ROTARY ACTUATORS

Transcription

ROTARY ACTUATORS

INDEX:
ROTARY ACTUATORS
Series RL
Pages 3A-1 to 3A-17
SERIES RL, RA, RI, RF, MINIATURE,
AIR/OIL TANDEM, AND MULTI-POSITION
Series RA
Pages 3B-1 to 3B-15
Exceptional Selection of Models, Sizes, Options, and Price Range
Miniature
(Series 0180 & 0183)
Pages 3C-1 to 3C-6
Series 1000-8000
Pages 3C-8 to 3C-12
NEW!
SERIES RI
ROTARY ACTUATORS
Multi-Position
Pages 3C-20 to 3C-28
Engineering Data
SERIES RF
ROTARY ACTUATORS
Plumbing Schematics
Pages 3C-32 and 3C-33
Start-up Procedure
Pages 3C-34
Options
Series RI
Pages 3D-1 to 3D-26
SERIES 2000-8000
AIR/OIL TANDEM
Series RF
Pages 3D-27 to 3D-43
SERIES 2000-8000
MULTI-POSITION
ROTARY ACTUATORS
1000-8000 MULTI-POSITION
ACTUATORS
SERIES RA
ROTARY ACTUATORS
SERIES RL
ROTARY ACTUATORS
MINIATURE
ROTARY
ACTUATORS
3-i
SOLUTIONS FOR
INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/products/rotaryactuators
-INDEX
Air/Oil Tandem
3-INDEX
ROTARY ACTUATORS
SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS
PHD Series RL Rotary Actuators cover a wide range of sizes
from miniature 12 mm bore units to 63 mm bore units. These
actuators have a very high torque to envelope ratio and are capable
of very high rotation velocities. Built-in optional shock absorbers
provide smooth deceleration of external loads.
Sizes: 8
Operating Media: Pneumatic, 150 psi [10 bar] maximum
Maximum Torque Output: 4.4 to 544 in-lb [.49 to 61.5 Nm]
SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS
PHD Series RA Rotary Actuators have zero backlash at ends of
rotation providing precise rotary positioning. Large shafts, bearings,
and rack provide high load-stopping capacity, exceptional radial and
axial bearing load ratings, and long unit life. Built-in optional shock
absorbers provide smooth deceleration of external loads.
Sizes: 5
Maximum Torque Output: 14 to 228 in-lb [1.6 to 25.8 Nm]
MINIATURE ROTARY ACTUATORS
SERIES 018075, 018050, & 0180375
PHD Miniature Rotary Actuators are lightweight, compact
units for small part orientation or part turn over. Adjustable stops
provide 0° to 180° rotation for pneumatic use. Also available in 3
Position and Air/Oil Tandem versions.
Sizes: 2
Maximum Torque Output: 9.75 to 33 in-lb [1.1 to 3.7 Nm]
ROTARY ACTUATORS
SERIES 1000-8000
Series 1000-8000 Rotary Actuators are a rugged line for
pneumatic or hydraulic service. These units have a wide range of
rotations, options, and shaft configurations allowing them to be
configured for most rotary applications. Standard rotations range up
to 450° with torques to 31,800 in-lb.
Sizes: 8
Operating Media: Pneumatic, 150 psi [10 bar] maximum,
Hydraulic, 1500 psi [100 bar] maximum
Maximum Torque Output: 57 to 31,800 in-lb [6.4 to 3595 Nm]
3-ii
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
AIR/OIL TANDEM ROTARY ACTUATORS
SERIES 2000-8000
Air/Oil Tandem Rotary Actuators provide the smooth control
of hydraulics with the simplicity of pneumatics. One end of the
actuator is a closed loop hydraulic control member. The other
provides pneumatic power to the racks.
-INDEX
Sizes: 4
Maximum Torque Output: 57 to 1,590 in-lb [6.4 to 179.8 Nm]
MULTI-POSITION ROTARY ACTUATORS
SERIES 2000-8000
Multi-Position Rotary Actuators can yield three, four, or five
rotary shaft stop positions. Each position is located by means of
positive internal stops.
Sizes: 4
Operating Media: Pneumatic, 150 psi [10 bar] maximum,
Hydraulic, 1500 psi [100 bar] maximum
Maximum Torque Output: Ranges from 57 to 15,900 in-lb
[6.4 to 1797.9 Nm]
SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATORS
Series RI Rotary Actuators incorporate internal air passages
within the rotary pinion manifold to allow pneumatic coupling to
other devices without tubing. This protection from severed or
damaged air lines eliminates downtime.
Sizes: 3
Maximum Torque Output: Ranges from 32 to 414 in-lb at 87psi
[3.6 to 46.8 Nm at 6 bar]
SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATORS
Series RF Rotary Actuators feature a low profile body design
with a large output mounting hub to cover a wide range of
applications. This rack and pinion design features high tensile steel
racks and a one-piece pinion/output hub providing durability and
long life.
NEW!
Sizes: 3
Maximum Torque Output: Ranges from 7 to 67 in-lb at 100 psi [0.8
to 7.7 Nm at 7 bar]
3-iii
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
INDEX:
ROTARY ACTUATORS
Ordering Data
Page 3A-2
SERIES RL
Benefits
Page 3A-3
Dimensions
Pages 3A-4 and 3A-5
Low Cost, High Torque, Compact Size
Engineering Data
Pages 3A-6 and 3A-7
Options
Pages 3A-8 to 3A-12
3A
Accessories
Page 3A-13
Rotary Actuator
Selection
Pages 3A-14 to 3A-15
Application Example
Page 3A-16 to 3A-17
3A-1
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/rl
www.phdinc.com/rl
BORE SIZE
12 mm
16 mm
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
63 mm
SHOCK ABSORBER
- Shock both directions
- Shock counterclockwise
- Shock clockwise
- Shock ready both directions
- Shock ready counterclockwise
- Shock ready clockwise
Shock absorber options not available
on 12 mm, 16 mm, and 20 mm units.
NB
NC
NW
GS
GT
GU
Switches must be ordered
separately. See notes
2, 3, and page 3A-10.
SWITCH READY
E - Hall Effect magnets for
Series 5360 Switch
I - Magnetoresistive
magnets for Series
5360 Switch
M- Reed magnets for Series
5360 Switch
-U options apply only to caps with angle
adjustment or shock absorber options.
Port Positions on all other caps are in
Position 5.
MISCELLANEOUS
GX - Mounting holes in Positions 3 & 4
(Positions 2 & 3 standard)
Q13 - Double shaft extension
U4 - Port Position 2
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
DESIGN NO.
1 - Imperial
5 - Metric
ANGLE OF ROTATION
45°, 90°, 135°, 180°,
225°, 270°
NOTES:
1) Shock pad and/or angle adjustment options not available in
the same direction with cushion or shock absorber options.
2) -E option not available on 12 mm and 16 mm units.
3) -M option not available on 12 mm units and a minimum of
90° of rotation required on 16 mm units.
4) For keyless hub adaptor kits, see page 3A-13.
SERIES
L - Medium Duty
CUSHION CONTROL
Cushion both directions
Cushion counterclockwise
Cushion clockwise
Shock Pad both directions
Shock Pad counterclockwise
Shock Pad clockwise
Cushions and shock pads not
available on same end of actuator.
Shock pad options not available
on 12 mm units.
DB DC DWBB BC BW -
SHOCK ABSORBER CHART
PHD SHOCK
BORE
SIZE ABSORBER NO.
25 mm
60335-04
32 mm
60335-05
40 mm
60335-06
50 mm
60335-06
63 mm
60335-07
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
AB - 45° Angle Adjustment both directions
AC - 45° Angle Adjustment counterclockwise
AW- 45° Angle Adjustment clockwise
R L S 1 40 x 180 - NC - BW - AW - E - Q13
TYPE
S - 150 psi [10 bar] Air Max.
PRODUCT
R - Rotary Actuator
TO ORDER SPECIFY:
Product, Series, Type, Design No.,
Bore Size, Angle of Rotation,
and Options.
3A
ORDERING DATA: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS
3A-2
SOLUTIONS FOR
BENEFITS: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS
BENEFITS
Series RL Rotary Actuators are available in 8 sizes and
6 standard rotations with torques ranging up to 360 in-lb at
100 psi [41 Nm at 7 bar] to suit a wide range of applications.
■
Series RL Rotary Actuators provide a very high torque to
envelope ratio.
■
Free-floating pistons with pressure and wear compensating
seals ensure minimum friction and long life.
■
Acetal pistons and rack bearings eliminate metal-to-metal
contact for smooth operation, long life and breakaway pressure
less than 5 psi [0.35 bar].
■
Sealed ball bearings provide smooth operation and reliability.
■
The high-strength alloy steel rack and one-piece pinion shaft
are designed and tested to operate for a minimum of 5 million
maintenance-free cycles.
■
Series RL Rotary Actuators are available in both imperial and
metric versions for worldwide markets.
■
Optional built-in adjustable cushions reduce shock at end of
rotation and increase load stopping capacity.
■
Optional 45° angle adjustments make it easy to adjust to
specific rotation requirements. This provides a total range of
actuator rotations from 0° to 270°.
■
Optional built-in hydraulic shock absorbers provide smooth
deceleration of attached loads.
■
Optional keyless hub adaptors available for easy and secure
mounting of interface components to the actuator output shaft.
These adaptors allow precise angular positioning of mounted
devices at any required angle.
■
PHD Miniature Proximity Switches mount easily into slots in
the actuator's body for interfacing with an electrical controller.
Units can be specified for use with PHD’s Miniature Reed, Hall
Effect, or Magnetoresistive Switches.
3A
■
SPECIFICATIONS
PISTON SEALS
PISTONS
PINION SHAFTS
RACKS
END CAPS
BODY
BEARINGS
PORTS
BREAKAWAY PRESSURE
LUBRICATION
WORKING PRESSURE
STANDARD ROTATIONS
OPTIONS
ACCESSORIES
12 mm-63 mm
One Block Vee per Piston
Free Floating, Acetal
One Piece Alloy Steel
Alloy Steel
Clear Anodized Aluminum
Hardcoated Aluminum
Two Steel Ball Bearings
NPT [BSP]
5 psi [0.35 bar]
Permanent for Non-Lube Air
150 psi [10 bar] Air Max.
45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, 225°, 270°
Cushions, Shock Pads,
Shock Absorber,
Magnets for Proximity Switches,
Angle Adjustments, Mounting Surface,
Double Pinion Shaft
Keyless Hub Adaptor
3A-3
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/rl
DIMENSIONS: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS
J
SLOT FOR
OPTIONAL SWITCH
J/2
1
G PORT
5
-Q13 SPECIFIED
WHEN ORDERING
Q
B
2
QA
K
4
EE
P
D
L
U x .067 [1.7] DP
3
E SQ
T
R KEY
RLS112 - SEE FIGURE 1 BELOW
RLS116, RLS120, RLS125 - WOODRUFF KEY
ALL OTHERS USE SQUARE/RECTANGULAR KEY
3A
M
M/2
H MTG THREAD
4X FRONT
4X BOTTOM
(POS 2 & 3 ONLY)
.170
C/2
N/2
C
FIGURE 1
FOR RLS112 ONLY
N
.394
A
F
NOTES:
1) CIRCLED NUMBERS INDICATE PORT MOUNTING SURFACE POSITION
2) NUMBERS IN [ ] ARE FOR METRIC UNITS AND ARE IN mm
3) KEYWAY SHOWN AT MID ROTATION
3A-4
All dimensions are reference only unless specifically toleranced.
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/rl
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
DIMENSIONS: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS
12 mm
16 mm
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
63 mm
NOMINAL ROTATION
45° OR 90°
135° OR 180°
225° OR 270°
45° OR 90°
135° OR 180°
225° OR 270°
45° OR 90°
135° OR 180°
225° OR 270°
45° OR 90°
135° OR 180°
225° OR 270°
45° OR 90°
135° OR 180°
225° OR 270°
45° OR 90°
135° OR 180°
225° OR 270°
45° OR 90°
135° OR 180°
225° OR 270°
45° OR 90°
135° OR 180°
225° OR 270°
A
2.047 [52.0]
2.579 [65.5]
3.110 [79.0]
2.461 [62.5]
3.091 [78.5]
3.563 [90.5]
2.854 [72.5]
3.248 [82.5]
3.957 [100.5]
3.504 [89.0]
3.976 [101.0]
4.921 [125.0]
3.720 [94.5]
4.705 [119.5]
5.866 [149.0]
4.626 [117.5]
5.925 [150.5]
7.500 [190.0]
5.295 [134.5]
6.850 [174.0]
8.661 [220.0]
6.535 [166.0]
8.504 [216.0]
10.846 [275.5]
B
C
D
E
F
EE
G PORT
H
.374 10-32 THD
1.201 1.024 .448 .964
.482
[30.5] [26.0] [11.5] [24.5] [12.25] [9.5] [M5 x 0.8]
4-40 x .224
[M3 x 0.5 x 6.0]
.374 10-32 THD
1.378 1.142 .530 1.082 .541
[35.0] [29.0] [13.5] [27.5] [13.75] [9.5] [M5 x 0.8]
4-40 x .224
[M3 x 0.5 x 6.0]
.374 10-32 THD
[9.5] [M5 x 0.8]
6-32 x .276
[M4 x 0.7 x 8.0]
.473
1.811 1.556 .623 1.516 .758
1/8 NPT
[46.0] [39.5] [16.0] [38.5] [19.25] [12.0] [1/8 BSP]
10-24 x .380
[M5 x 0.8 x 10.0]
.473
2.244 1.772 .788 1.732 .866
1/8 NPT
[57.0] [45.0] [20.0] [44.0] [22.0] [12.0] [1/8 BSP]
10-24 x .380
[M5 x 0.8 x 10.0]
2.579 2.126 .866 2.086 1.043 .473
1/8 NPT
[65.5] [54.0] [22.0] [53.0] [26.5] [12.0] [1/8 BSP]
1/4-20 x .500
[M6 x 1.0 x 12.0]
3.248 2.540 1.004 2.480 1.240 .650
1/4 NPT
[82.5] [64.5] [25.5] [63.0] [31.5] [16.5] [1/4 BSP]
5/16-18 x .625
[M8 x 1.25 x 16.0]
3.858 3.168 1.279 2.972 1.486 .650
1/4 NPT
[98.0] [80.5] [32.5] [75.5] [37.75] [16.5] [1/4 BSP]
5/16-18 x .625
[M8 x 1.25 x 16.0]
1.634 1.300 .532 1.260 .630
[41.5] [33.0] [13.5] [32.0] [16.0]
BORE SIZE
J
K
L
M
N
P [h8]
Q
QA
R
T
U
12 mm
1.062
[27.0]
.866
[22.0]
.335
[8.5]
1.378
[35.0]
.630
[16.0]
.1875
[6.0]
.630
[16.0]
—
SEE FIGURE 1
[2.0 SQ x 10.0]
.233
[5.9]
.7485
[19.0]
16 mm
1.142
[29.0]
1.004
[25.5]
.373
[9.5]
1.536
[39.0]
.650
[16.5]
.2495
[8.0]
.748
[19.0]
.312
[7.92]
203 WOODRUFF
[3.0 SQ x 14.0]
.289
[7.3]
.8666
[22.0]
20 mm
1.102
[28.0]
1.220
[31.0]
.354
[9.0]
1.516
[38.5]
.906
[23.0]
.3125
[8.0]
.748
[19.0]
.437
[11.1]
204 WOODRUFF
[3.0 SQ x 14.0]
.349
[8.9]
.8666
[22.0]
25 mm
1.378
[35.0]
1.397
[35.5]
.443
[11.25]
1.968
[50.0]
1.182
[30.0]
.3745
[10.0]
1.004
[25.5]
.437
[11.1]
204 WOODRUFF
[3.0 SQ x 16.0]
.292
[7.4]
1.0241
[26.0]
32 mm
1.614
[41.0]
1.850
[47.0]
.631
[16.0]
2.204
[56.0]
1.260
[32.0]
.4995
[14.0]
1.260
[32.0]
—
1/8 SQ x 3/4
[5.0 SQ x 20.0]
.488
[12.4]
1.2603
[32.0]
40 mm
2.028
[51.5]
2.146
[54.5]
.650
[16.5]
2.874
[73.0]
1.534
[39.0]
.6245
[16.0]
1.496
[38.0]
—
3/16 SQ x 1.00
[5.0 SQ x 25.0]
.476
[12.1]
1.3785
[35.0]
50 mm
2.480
[63.0]
2.677
[68.0]
.670
[17.0]
3.308
[84.0]
1.850
[47.0]
.7495
[20.0]
1.752
[44.5]
—
3/16 SQ x 1-1/4
[6.0 SQ x 30.0]
.725
[18.4]
1.6540
[42.0]
63 mm
2.716
[69.0]
3.248
[82.5]
.945
[24.0]
3.544
[90.0]
2.204
[56.0]
.9995
[30.0]
2.007
[51.0]
—
1/4 SQ x 1-3/8
[8.0 x 7.0 x 36.0 RECT]
.849
[21.6]
2.1659
[55.0]
Numbers in [ ] are for metric units and are in mm.
3A-5
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/rl
3A
BORE SIZE
ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS
RL SPECIFICATIONS
BORE
SIZE
12 mm
16 mm
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
63 mm
GEAR RACKS
45°-270°
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PISTON DIAMETER
mm
in
12
.47
16
.63
20
.79
25
.98
32
1.26
40
1.58
50
1.97
63
2.48
PISTON AREA
mm2
in2
.18
112.90
.31
201.29
.49
314.19
.76
490.32
1.25
804.19
1.95
1256.64
3.04
1963.48
4.83
3117.41
3A
PRESSURE AND BREAKAWAY RATINGS
DISPLACEMENT
in /DEG. ROT.
mm3/DEG. ROT.
.0005
8.19
.001
16.39
.002
32.77
.004
65.55
.008
131.10
.017
278.58
.032
524.39
.063
1032.38
3
BEARING LOADS TABLE
All Series RL Rotary Actuators have a maximum pressure
rating of 150 psi [10 bar] with a 5 psi [0.3 bar] breakaway pressure.
They are for pneumatic application only.
BORE
SIZE
12 mm
16 mm
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
63 mm
OPERATING TEMPERATURES
Standard Series RL Rotary Actuators are recommended for use
in temperatures from -20° to +180°F [-28° to +82°C]. Consult PHD
for operation at temperatures outside this range.
LUBRICATION
All units are pre-lubricated at assembly for operation with
non-lubricated air. Service life can be extended by periodic
lubrication of the rack and pinion with high grade bearing grease
and by using lubricated air.
AXIAL
BEARING LOAD
CAPACITY
lb
N
26
115
39
173
39
173
110
489
160
711
184
818
285
1267
450
2001
RADIAL
BEARING LOAD
CAPACITY
lb
N
165
734
230 1023
230 1023
320 1423
390 1734
420 1868
660 2935
925 4114
DISTANCE
BETWEEN
BEARINGS
mm
in
16.6
.65
18.6
.73
22.6
.89
28.1
1.11
32.6
1.28
40.6
1.60
49.1
1.93
64.1
2.52
ANGLE OF ROTATION
Standard angles of rotation are 45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, 225°, and
270°. Consult PHD for other rotation requirements. All units with
optional angle adjustments provide 90° of total angle adjustment.
ROTATIONAL TOLERANCE
The total rotational tolerance of the Series RL Rotary Actuator
is +10°, -0° on specified rotation.
BACKLASH
BORE SIZE
12 mm & 16 mm
20 mm & 25 mm
32 mm & 40 mm
50 mm & 63 mm
MAXIMUM
BACKLASH
1° 30'
1° 0'
0° 45'
0° 30'
ROTATIONAL VELOCITY
BORE SIZE
12 mm & 16 mm
20 mm, 25 mm, & 32 mm
40 mm
50 mm & 63 mm
MAXIMUM
VELOCITY
180°/.030 sec
180°/.050 sec
180°/.060 sec
180°/.075 sec
3A-6
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/rl
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS
THEORETICAL TORQUE OUTPUT
12 mm
in-lb Nm
1.2 .13
1.5 .16
1.8 .20
2.0 .23
2.3 .26
2.6 .30
2.9 .33
3.5 .40
3.8 .43
4.1 .46
4.4 .49
16 mm
in-lb Nm
2.5 .28
3.1 .35
3.7 .42
4.4 .49
5.0 .56
5.6 .64
6.2 .71
7.5 .85
8.1 .92
8.7 .99
9.4 1.1
20 mm
in-lb Nm
4.9 .55
6.1 .69
7.3 .83
8.5 .96
9.7 1.1
1.2
11
1.4
12
1.7
15
1.8
16
1.9
17
2.1
18
BORE SIZE
25 mm
32 mm
in-lb Nm
in-lb Nm
2.1
19
9.1 1.0
2.6
23
1.3
11
3.2
28
1.6
14
3.7
33
1.8
16
4.2
37
2.1
18
4.8
42
2.3
21
5.3
47
2.6
23
6.3
56
3.1
27
6.9
61
3.4
30
7.4
65
3.6
32
7.9
70
3.9
34
40mm
Nm
in-lb
4.4
39
5.5
49
6.6
58
7.7
68
8.8
78
9.9
88
11
97
13
117
14
127
15
136
146
17
50 mm
Nm
in-lb
8.3
73
10
91
12
110
14
128
17
146
19
164
21
183
25
219
27
237
29
256
31
274
63 mm
Nm
in-lb
16
145
20
181
25
217
29
254
33
290
37
326
41
362
49
435
53
471
57
507
61
544
3A
INPUT
PRESSURE
psi bar
40 2.7
50 3.4
60 4.1
70 4.8
80 5.5
90 6.2
100 6.8
120 8.2
130 8.9
140 9.6
150 10
ROTARY ACTUATOR WEIGHT TABLE
BORE
SIZE
12 mm
16 mm
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
63 mm
TYPE OF
UNIT
PLAIN
CUSHION
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
PLAIN
CUSHION
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
PLAIN
CUSHION
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
PLAIN
CUSHION
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
PLAIN
CUSHION
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
PLAIN
CUSHION
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
PLAIN
CUSHION
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
PLAIN
CUSHION
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
45° OR 90°
kg
lb
0.13
0.3
0.18
0.4
0.18
0.4
0.18
0.4
0.23
0.5
0.27
0.6
0.32
0.7
0.41
0.9
0.41
0.9
0.50
1.1
0.64
1.4
0.64
1.4
0.77
1.7
0.91
2.0
1.07
2.4
1.17
2.6
1.45
3.2
1.63
3.6
2.36
5.2
2.72
6.0
3.08
6.8
4.17
9.2
10.4 4.71
10.6 4.81
NOMINAL ROTATION
135° OR 180° 225° OR 270°
kg
lb
kg
lb
0.18
0.4
0.18
0.4
0.22
0.5
0.18
0.4
0.22
0.5
0.22
0.5
0.27
0.6
0.22
0.5
0.32
0.7
0.27
0.6
0.32
0.7
0.32
0.7
0.41
0.9
0.36
0.8
0.45
1.0
0.41
0.9
0.50
1.1
0.45
1.0
0.64
1.4
0.54
1.2
0.70
1.6
0.68
1.5
0.80
1.7
0.68
1.5
1.04
2.3
0.91
2.0
1.22
2.7
1.04
2.3
1.36
3.0
1.22
2.7
1.95
4.3
1.49
3.3
2.22
4.9
1.81
4.0
2.40
5.3
1.95
4.3
3.13
6.9
2.72
6.0
3.49
7.7
3.04
6.7
3.85
8.5
3.45
7.6
12.3 5.57
10.5 4.76
13.5 6.12
11.8 5.35
13.7 6.21
12.0 5.44
NOTE: Units with shock pad options are the same approximate weight as plain units. Units
with shock absorber options are the same approximate weight as units with angle adjustment.
3A-7
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/rl
OPTIONS: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS
AB
45° ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
BOTH DIRECTIONS
G PORT
AC
COUNTERCLOCKWISE DIRECTION
V MAX
F
AW
CLOCKWISE DIRECTION
EE
Angle adjustment screws each allow the nominal angle of
rotation to be reduced by up to 45° from each end of rotation (-AC
or -AW options). With adjustments at both ends of the unit, a total
reduction of 90° (-AB option) can be achieved. Angle adjustment is
available in either or both directions.
3A
Y HEX
T
E SQ
THREAD SEAL AND WASHER
NOTE: Angle adjustment options are not available with cushion
or shock absorber options in the same direction.
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT SCREW
BORE SIZE
12 mm
16 mm
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
63 mm
NOMINAL ROTATION
45°, 90°, 180°, 270°
45°, 90°, 180°, 270°
45°, 90°, 180°, 270°
45°, 90°, 180°, 270°
45°, 90°, 180°, 270°
45°, 90°, 180°, 270°
45°, 90°, 180°, 270°
45°, 90°, 180°, 270°
E
.964 [24.5]
1.082 [27.5]
1.260 [32.0]
1.516 [38.5]
1.732 [44.0]
2.086 [53.0]
2.480 [63.0]
2.972 [75.5]
EE
.482 [12.25]
.541 [13.75]
.630 [16.0]
.758 [19.25]
.866 [22.0]
1.043 [26.5]
1.240 [31.5]
1.486 [37.75]
G
F
.552 [14.0] 10-32 THD [M5 x 0.8]
.552 [14.0] 10-32 THD [M5 x 0.8]
.552 [14.0] 10-32 THD [M5 x 0.8]
.827 [21.0] 1/8 NPT [1/8 BSP]
.827 [21.0] 1/8 NPT [1/8 BSP]
.984 [25.0] 1/8 NPT [1/8 BSP]
1.024 [26.0] 1/4 NPT [1/4 BSP]
1.024 [26.0] 1/4 NPT [1/4 BSP]
T
.233 [5.9]
.289 [7.3]
.349 [8.9]
.292 [7.4]
.488 [12.4]
.476 [12.1]
.725 [18.4]
.849 [21.6]
V
.511 [13.0]
.649 [16.5]
.747 [19.0]
.767 [19.5]
.984 [25.0]
1.421 [36.1]
1.378 [35.0]
1.378 [35.0]
Y
4 mm
4 mm
6 mm
6 mm
8 mm
10 mm
10 mm
10 mm
SHOCK PADS
BB
SHOCK PAD INSTALLED
BOTH DIRECTIONS
BC
SHOCK PAD INSTALLED
BW
SHOCK PAD INSTALLED
CLOCKWISE DIRECTION
Polyurethane shock pads for noise reduction and absorption of
shock at ends of rotation are available on each end of Series RL
Rotary Actuators. Reduction of shock permits higher piston
velocities for shorter cycle times. Noise reduction is beneficial for
the working environment. See pages 3A-14 through 3A-15 for
information on unit stopping capacity.
NOTE: Shock pad options are not available on 12 mm units, or
with shock absorber or cushion options in the same direction.
3A-8
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/rl
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
DB
CUSHION BOTH DIRECTIONS
DC
CUSHION COUNTERCLOCKWISE
DIRECTION
CUSHION CLOCKWISE
CUSHION
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
F
DW
1
G PORT
E/2
CUSHION CLOCKWISE DIRECTION
2
4
EE
PHD Cushions allow smooth deceleration at the end of rotation.
When a cushion is activated, the remaining volume of air in the
exhaust side of the actuator is expelled through an adjustable needle
valve, controlling the rate of deceleration of the pinion shaft. The
effective cushion length is approximately 40° at the end of full
nominal rotation. See pages 3A-14 through 3A-15 for information
on unit stopping capacity.
Cushion performance will not be realized on units of 45° or
less due to 40° of effective cushion length.
T
3A
E SQUARE
3
NOTE: Cushion options are not available with angle adjustment,
shock absorber, or shock pad options in the same direction.
BORE SIZE
12 mm
16 mm
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
63 mm
NOMINAL ROTATION
45°, 90°, 135°,180°, 225°, 270°
45°, 90°, 135°,180°, 225°, 270°
45°, 90°, 135°,180°, 225°, 270°
45°, 90°, 135°,180°, 225°, 270°
45°, 90°, 135°,180°, 225°, 270°
45°, 90°, 135°,180°, 225°, 270°
45°, 90°, 135°,180°, 225°, 270°
45°, 90°, 135°,180°, 225°, 270°
E
.964 [24.5]
1.082 [27.5]
1.260 [32.0]
1.516 [38.5]
1.732 [44.0]
2.086 [53.0]
2.480 [63.0]
2.972 [75.5]
EE
.226 [5.75]
.728 [18.5]
.856 [21.75]
1.043 [26.5]
1.161 [29.5]
1.457 [37.0]
1.752 [44.5]
1.998 [50.75]
F
.728 [18.5]
.827 [21.0]
.866 [22.0]
1.004 [25.5]
1.063 [27.0]
1.142 [29.0]
1.260 [32.0]
1.260 [32.0]
G
10-32 THD [M5 x 0.8]
10-32 THD [M5 x 0.8]
10-32 THD [M5 x 0.8]
1/8 NPT [1/8 BSP]
1/8 NPT [1/8 BSP]
1/8 NPT [1/8 BSP]
1/4 NPT [1/4 BSP]
1/4 NPT [1/4 BSP]
T
.233 [5.9]
.289 [7.3]
.349 [8.9]
.292 [7.4]
.488 [12.4]
.476 [12.1]
.725 [18.4]
.849 [21.6]
GX
MOUNTING HOLES IN
POSITIONS 3 & 4
1
5
This option provides mounting holes on the back side
(position 4) and the bottom side (position 3). Standard units are
supplied with mounting holes on the front side (position 2) and the
bottom side (position 3). The mounting pattern for this option is
identical to the pattern shown in the dimensions on pages
3A-4 and 3A-5.
2
4
3
3A-9
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/rl
E
MAGNETS FOR PHD MINIATURE
HALL EFFECT SWITCHES
This option equips the rotary actuator with magnets on the rack
for use with PHD Series 5360 Miniature Hall Effect Switches. These
switches mount easily to the actuator using the “T” slot in the top of
the body. Not available on 12 mm and 16 mm units.
3A
PART NO.
53603-1-02
53604-1-02
53623-1
53624-1
I
COLOR
Yellow
Red
Yellow
Red
DESCRIPTION
NPN (Sink) 4.5-24 VDC, 2 meter cable
PNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC, 2 meter cable
NPN (Sink) 4.5-24 VDC, Quick Connect
PNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC, Quick Connect
MAGNETORESISTIVE SWITCHES
for use with PHD Magnetoresistive Switches. These switches mount
easily to the actuator using the “T” slot in the top of the body.
Minimum sensing rotation of 90° for 12 mm and 16 mm units.
PART NO.
53605-1-02
53606-1-02
53625-1
53626-1
M
COLOR
Black
Orange
Black
Orange
.317 [8.0]
DESCRIPTION
NPN 6-24 VDC, 2 m cable
PNP 6-24 VDC, 2 m cable
NPN 6-24 VDC, Quick Connect
PNP 6-24 VDC, Quick Connect
REED SWITCHES
for use with PHD Series 5360 Miniature Reed Switches. These
the body. Not available on 12 mm units. Minimum sensing rotation
of 90° for 16 mm units.
PHD Series 5360 Miniature Hall Effect, Reed, and
Magnetoresistive Switches are designed specifically to provide
an input signal to various types of programmable controllers of
logic systems. See Switches and Sensors section for information on
the Series 5360 Miniature Switches.
PART NO.
53602-2-02
53609-2-02
53622-2
53629-2
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
White Sink or Source Type 4.5-24 VDC, 2 meter cable
Green AC Type 110-120 VAC with Current Limit,
2 meter cable
White Sink or Source Type VDC, Quick Connect
Green AC Type 110-120 VAC, Quick Connect
with Current Limit
3A-10
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/rl
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
NB
SHOCK ABSORBER INSTALLED
BOTH DIRECTIONS
NC
PHD,
Inc.
THREAD SEAL
COVER
WASHER
CLOCKWISE DIRECTION
CAP
Hydraulic shock absorbers provide optimum control of
deceleration and maximum load stopping capacity. The -NB, -NC,
and -NW options equip the rotary actuator with a hydraulic shock
absorber installed in the cap(s). See pages 3A-14 through 3A-15 for
details of stopping capacity with built-in shock absorbers. Shock
absorbers are nominally effective for 45° of rotation each direction.
SHOCK ABSORBER
(COUNTERCLOCKWISE)
SHOCK LOCK NUT
F
A MAX
B ACROSS
FLATS
3A
NW
SHOCK ABSORBER
(CLOCKWISE)
NOTE: The shock absorber also provides the rotation
adjustment. Shock absorber options are not available on 12 mm,
16 mm, or 20 mm units or with angle adjustment, cushion, or shock
pad options in the same direction.
GS
SHOCK ABSORBER READY
BOTH DIRECTIONS
GT
GU
CLOCKWISE DIRECTION
SHOCK ABSORBER
MOUNTING HOLE
(CLOCKWISE)
, Inc .
PH D
SHOCK ABSORBER
READY CAPS
The -GS, -GT, and -GU options should only be ordered if the
shock absorber(s) is to be supplied separately from the rotary
actuator. These options make provisions for the installation of
hydraulic shock absorbers but do not include the shock absorber
units. They include the shock sealing kit for each direction ordered.
See pages 3A-14 through 3A-15 for details of stopping capacity with
built-in shock absorbers.
NOTE: The shock absorber also provides rotation adjustment.
Shock absorbers must be installed in the rotary actuator body prior
to operating the unit. Operation without shock absorbers can
SHOCK ABSORBER
MOUNTING HOLE
(COUNTERCLOCKWISE)
damage the actuator and void the warranty. Only shock absorbers
specified by PHD should be used in Series RL Rotary Actuators. The
use of any other shock absorbers will adversely affect actuator
performance and service life.
SHOCK ABSORBER SPECIFICATIONS
BORE
SIZE
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
63 mm
PHD
SHOCK
ABSORBER
NUMBER
60335-04
60335-05
60335-06
60335-06
60335-07
THREAD
TYPE
9/16-18
3/4-16
1-12
1-12
1-12
STROKE
in mm
.19 4.83
.25 6.35
.29 7.37
.29 7.37
.37 9.40
SHOCK
ABSORBER
WEIGHT
kg
lb
.12 .05
.34 .15
.57 .26
.57 .26
.57 .26
KINETIC
ENERGY
LOAD
Nm
in-lb
.23
2.00
.45
4.00
10.00 1.13
16.00 1.81
28.00 3.16
A
B ACROSS
MAX.
FLATS
F
mm in mm
in
in
2.35 59.7 .50 12.7 .827
2.75 69.6 .69 17.5 .827
3.81 96.8 .88 22.2 .984
3.77 95.8 .88 22.2 1.024
3.76 95.4 .88 22.2 1.024
mm
21.0
21.0
25.0
26.0
26.0
3A-11
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/rl
Q13
BORE SIZE
DOUBLE SHAFT EXTENSION
12 mm
This option provides a shaft extension out the front side
(position 2) and the back side (position 4) of the actuator. This
double shaft extension can be used for mounting tooling, fixturing,
or for tripping external proximity switches. The one-piece pinion
construction provides the same bearing load capacities for both
front and rear shaft extensions.
16 mm
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
BORE SIZE
3A
12 mm
16 mm
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
63 mm
P [h8]
.1875
[6.0]
.2495
[8.0]
.3125
[8.0]
.3745
[10.0]
.4995
[14.0]
.6245
[16.0]
.7495
[20.0]
.9995
[30.0]
Q
.630
[16.0]
.748
[19.0]
.748
[19.0]
1.004
[25.5]
1.260
[32.0]
1.496
[38.0]
1.752
[44.5]
2.007
[51.0]
R
SEE FIGURE 1, PAGE 3A-4
[2.0 SQ x 10.0]
203 WOODRUFF
[3.0 SQ x 14.0]
204 WOODRUFF
[3.0 SQ x 14.0]
204 WOODRUFF
[3.0 SQ x 16.0]
1/8 SQ x 3/4
[5.0 SQ x 20.0]
3/16 SQ x 1.00
[5.0 SQ x 25.0]
3/16 SQ x 1-1/4
[6.0 SQ x 30.0]
1/4 SQ x 1-3/8
[8.0 x 7.0 x 36.0 RECT]
40 mm
50 mm
63 mm
Q
.630
[16.0]
.748
[19.0]
.748
[19.0]
1.004
[25.5]
1.260
[32.0]
1.496
[38.0]
1.752
[44.5]
2.007
[51.0]
P [h8]
.1875
[6.0]
.2495
[8.0]
.3125
[8.0]
.3745
[10.0]
.4995
[14.0]
.6245
[16.0]
.7495
[20.0]
.9995
[30.0]
R
SEE FIGURE 1, PAGE 3A-4
[2.0 SQ x 10.0]
203 WOODRUFF
[3.0 SQ x 14.0]
204 WOODRUFF
[3.0 SQ x 14.0]
204 WOODRUFF
[3.0 SQ x 16.0]
1/8 SQ x 3/4
[5.0 SQ x 20.0]
3/16 SQ x 1.00
[5.0 SQ x 25.0]
3/16 SQ x 1-1/4
[6.0 SQ x 30.0]
1/4 SQ x 1-3/8
[8.0 x 7.0 x 36.0 RECT]
U4
PORT POSITION 2
U6
PORT POSITION 3
U8
PORT POSITION 4
1
5
2
Port positions on units with angle adjustment or shock
absorber options are provided with a standard port in position 1.
The port position may be rotated by specifying the desired option.
3A-12
4
3
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/rl
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
ACCESSORIES: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS
KEYLESS HUB ADAPTOR KIT
This kit provides an output hub for simple attachment of
tooling or other PHD actuators to the Series RL Rotary Actuators.
The PHD Keyless Hub Adaptor can be precisely adjusted to any
angular and axial position on the rotary actuator shaft for maximum
application versatility.
KEYLESS HUB ADAPTOR
GRIPPER
B
3A
A ACROSS FLATS
(HEX)
D Ø d SHAFT
.050 [1.27 mm] MIN
HUB/MTG COMPONENT
NOT INCLUDED
L2
L1
IMPERIAL
UNIT
RLS112
RLS116
RLS120
RLS125
RLS132
RLS140
RLS150
RLS163
TRANTORQUE
PART
NUMBER
6202103
6202105
6202107
6202109
6202112
6202120
6202160
6202240
PHD
PART
NUMBER
60264-01
60264-02
60264-03
60264-04
60264-06
60264-09
60264-11
60264-15
METRIC
UNIT
RLS512
RLS516
RLS520
RLS525
RLS532
RLS540
RLS550
RLS563
TRANTORQUE
PART
NUMBER
6202660
6202680
6202680
6202700
6202740
6202760
6202811
6202835
PHD
D
L1
D
d
PART
TOL. mm
NUMBER mm mm
60265-02 6 16.0 ± .0015 19.0
60265-04 8 19.0 ± .0015 22.0
60265-04 8 19.0 ± .0015 22.0
60265-06 10 22.5 ± .0015 25.5
60265-09 14 25.5 ± .0015 28.5
60265-11 16 25.5 ± .0015 28.5
60265-17 20 45.0 ± .003 47.5
60265-22 30 51.0 ± .003 57.0
d
in
.188
.250
.313
.375
.500
.625
.750
1.00
D
in
.625
.625
.750
.750
.875
1.50
1.50
1.75
D
TOL.
± .0015
± .0015
± .0015
± .0015
± .0015
± .0015
± .003
± .003
L1
in
.750
.750
.875
.875
1.00
1.50
1.50
1.875
A
in
.500
.500
.625
.625
.750
1.25
1.25
1.50
MAX. TRANSMISSIBLE
INSTALLATION
TORQUE THRUST WEIGHT TORQUE ON NUT
in-lb
lb
oz
in-lb
125
700
.50
100
125
790
.50
150
150
890
1.0
200
150
925
1.0
250
175
980
1.5
350
1200
3300
8.0
1750
1200
4400
8.0
2500
1500
6600
11.0
3500
L2
A
B
mm mm mm
9.5
13
3
11.0 3
16
11.0 5
16
12.5 5
19
16.0 5
22
16.0 5
22
21.5 11 38
21.5 13 46
MAX. TRANSMISSIBLE
INSTALLATION
TORQUE THRUST WEIGHT TORQUE ON NUT
kg
kN
Nm
Nm
0.014
3.4
16
19.1
0.028
4.0
23
17.0
0.028
4.0
23
17.0
0.042
4.2
30
19.8
0.560
4.4
44
22.6
0.560
4.5
50
22.6
0.310
21.0
290
170
0.450
35.4
580
225
L2
in
.375
.375
.438
.438
.500
.750
.750
.875
B
in
.125
.125
.125
.125
.188
.313
.313
.438
NOTE: The torque required to install Trantorque adaptors exceeds the maximum value that can be safely applied to the rack and pinion
assembly of Series RL Rotary Actuators. The tooling or component attached to the Trantorque adaptor must be constrained, to avoid
excessive loading on the pinion gear, while the nut is being tightened to the torque specified above. Failure to follow this procedure will
result in damage to the actuator.
3A-13
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/rl
ROTARY ACTUATOR SELECTION: RL ROTARY ACTUATORS
To select the appropriate RL rotary actuator, it is crucial to consider
several factors including bearing capacity, torque requirements and
stopping capacity of the actuator. The bearing capacities are listed
on page 3A-6. To determine the required torque to rotate the load in
a given time, the rotational mass moments of inertia, gravity, time
and acceleration must be taken into account. To stop an actuator, all
of the same required information for torque is needed plus kinetic
energy. Follow the steps below to select the appropriate RL actuator.
1)
Review pages 3A-6 to make sure RL rotary actuator bearings
can withstand axial and radial bearing loads.
2)
Determine the torque requirements of the actuator.
3A
a)
b)
3)
Determine the stopping capacity of the actuator by using the
equation given below.
KINETIC ENERGY BASIC EQUATION
a)
KE = 1/2 Jm ω2 (Fa)
Determine the rotational velocity by using equation A.
ROTATIONAL VELOCITY EQUATIONS
EQUATION A
Average Velocity (rad/sec)
Uniformly accelerated from rest
Determine Mass Moment of Inertia.
Select the illustration from the application types on the
following page that most resembles your specific
application. Several separate calculations may be
necessary to fully describe your application. Using the
appropriate application equation, calculate the mass
moment of inertia for each type of illustration. The total
mass moment of inertia will be the sum of the individual
calculations.
Determine the necessary acceleration.
ω=
b)
Using Jm from step 2a and velocity from step 3a,
calculate the kinetic energy of the application.
c)
Select an appropriate Fa factor from the table below.
UNIT
DESCRIPTION
plain unit
with cushion
with shocks
2 x (Rotation angle in radians)
Acceleration (α) =
(Time of Rotation in Seconds)2
.035 x (Rotation angle in degrees)
Acceleration (α) =
c)
rad .0175 x Degrees of Rotation
=
sec Time of Rotation in seconds
APPLICATION
FACTORS (Fa)
4
4
1.35
d)
Calculate the required torque.
torque will be the sum of the individual calculations.
Note: Torque calculations are theoretical, an appropriate
safety factor should be considered. PHD recommends a
minimum safety factor of 2 to account for friction loss,
airline and valve size, and attached accessories.
Use the KE Energy Table below to select appropriate
RL actuator.
KINETIC ENERGY TABLE
BORE
SIZE
12 mm
16 mm
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
63 mm
KE MAX.
PLAIN UNIT
in-lb Nm
.10 .0113
.15 .0170
.17 .0192
.21 .0237
.46 .0520
.96 .1085
1.70 .1921
2.00 .226
KE MAX. WITH
SHOCK PAD
in-lb Nm
—
—
.26 .0294
.30 .0390
.37 .0418
.81 .0915
1.68 .1898
2.98 .3367
3.50 .3955
KE MAX. WITH
CUSHION
in-lb Nm
.35 .0396
.53 .0599
.60 .0678
.74 .0836
1.61 .1819
3.36 .3800
5.95 .6724
7.00 .7910
KE MAX. WITH
SHOCK ABSORBER
Nm
in-lb
—
—
—
—
—
—
.2260
2.00
.4520
4.00
10.00 1.1300
16.00 1.8080
28.00 3.1640
3A-14
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/rl
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
ROTARY ACTUATOR SELECTION: SERIES RL
IMPERIAL UNITS:
Jm = Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (in-lb-sec2) (Dependent on physical size of object and weight)
g = Gravitational Constant = 386.4 in/sec2
Fg = Weight of Load (lb)
k = Radius of Gyration (in)
α = Acceleration (rad/sec2)
t = time (sec)
T = Torque required to rotate load (in-lbs)
SF = Safety Factor
METRIC UNITS:
Jm = Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (N-m-sec2) (Dependent on physical size of object and weight)
g = Gravitational Constant = 9.81 m/sec2
Fg = Weight of Load (N)
k = Radius of Gyration (m)
t = time (sec)
T = Torque required to rotate load (N-m)
SF = Safety Factor
M = Mass = Fg / g (kg)
BALANCED LOADS
T = Jm x α x SF
Disk
Solid Sphere
End mounted on center
Mounted on center
3A
Disk
Mounted on center
L
k
k
k
2
Jm = Fg x k
g
2
1
Fg
x
x
4
g
Jm =
LOAD ORIENTATION
2
( L3 + k )
Jm =
2
2 Fg
x x k2
5
g
Rectangular Plate
Rod
Mounted on center
Mounted on center
k dim is
radius
of rod
b
Tg = Rotating Vertically
(with gravity)
a
a
2
2
Jm = Fg x a + b
g
12
T = Rotating Horizontally
(without gravity)
UNBALANCED LOADS
2
2
Jm = Fg x a + 3k
12
g
UNBALANCED LOADS
Tg = [(Jm x α) + (Fg x k)] x SF
T = Jm x α x SF
Tg = [(Jm x α) + [(Fg2 - Fg1) x (a + ( b-a ))]] x SF
2
T = Jm x α x SF
Rectangular Plate
Point Load
Mounted off center
Rod
Mounted off center
k dim is
radius
of rod
Fg2
c
Fg2
b
k
Fg
Fg1
b
Fg1
a
a
Jm =
Fg
x k2
g
2
2
2
2
Jm = Fg1 x 4a + c + Fg2 x 4b + c
g
g
12
12
Jm =
(Fg
g1
2
2
Fg2 (4b2 + 3k2)
x
x (4a + 3k ) +
g
12
12
)(
)
3A-15
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/rl
APPLICATION EXAMPLE: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS
EXAMPLE A-Disk rotating about centerline of unit.
Numbers in [ ] are for metric
units and are in mm.
1) Determine load information:
IMPERIAL
180°/.10 sec
Aluminum Disk
.236 lb
ROTATION ANGLE / TIME
LOAD
WEIGHT
MASS
PRESSURE
SAFETY FACTOR
k
METRIC
180°/.10 sec
Aluminum Disk
1.05 N
.107 Kg
6 bar
2
87 psi
2
1.00
[25.4]
k
1.75
[44.45]
b) Using Jm from step 2a and velocity from step 3a, determine
KE of the system from the basic KE equation:
2) Determine torque requirement for the application:
3A
a) Calculate Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (Jm) using
equations given on page 3A-15.
IMPERIAL
Jm =
IMPERIAL
KE = 1/2 x Jm x ω 2 x Fa
KE = .5 x .000234 x 31.52 x 4
KE = .464 in-lbs
METRIC
k2
Fg
x
g
2
Jm =
Jm = .236 lb x (.875 in)
386.4
2
2
Jm =
Jm = .000234 in-lb-sec2
Fg
k2
x
g
2
1.05 N
(.0222m) 2
x
9.81
2
Jm = 2.64 x 10-5 N-m-sec2
IF SHOCKS ARE USED:
IMPERIAL
METRIC
KE = 1/2 x Jm x ω2 x Fa
KE = .5 x .000234 x 31.52 x 1.35 KE = .5 x 2.64 x 10-5 x 31.52 x 1.35
KE = .157 in-lbs
KE = .018 N-m
When the recommended shocks are used, three times the KE can
be handled, or conversely, a smaller unit can be used.
b) Determine required acceleration of the load:
c) Use the KE Energy table on page 3A-14 to select the
appropriate RL actuator. The following units satisfy the
requirements. 32 mm plain, 32 mm with shock pad,
or 25 mm with cushions.
α = .035 x rotational angle (deg)2
[rotational time (sec)]
α = .035 x
METRIC
KE = .5 x 2.64 x 10-5 x 31.52 x 4
KE = .052 N-m
180° = 630 rad/sec2
(.1 sec)2
c) Calculate required torque:
IMPERIAL
METRIC
T = Jm x α x SF
T = Jm x α x 2
T = .000234 x 630 x 2 = .29 in-lbs
T = 2.64 x 10-5 x 630 x 2 = .03 N-m
Review torque chart on page 3A-7 for 87 psi [6 bar] to select
minimum actuator based on torque.
3) Determine the stopping capacity of the actuator for the
application:
a) Determine the average rotational velocity using Equation A
on page 3A-14.
ω = rad/sec = .0175 x
rotation angle (deg)
rotational time (sec)
ω = .0175 x 180° = 31.5 rad/sec
.1 sec
3A-16
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/rl
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
APPLICATION EXAMPLE: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS
EXAMPLE B-Combination of rectangular plate mounted on
center and a point load mounted off center.
6" [152.4] (a)
PRESSURE
SAFETY FACTOR
2"
[50.8]
(b)
METRIC
180°/.5 sec
Steel Plate
7.55 N
.77 Kg
4.45 N
(50.8 mm off center)
6 bar
2
1 lb
(2" off center)
87 psi
2
2"
[50.8]
(k)
RECTANGULAR PLATE
equations given on page 3A-15.
POINT LOAD
IMPERIAL
Jm =
Jm =
METRIC
Fg
Jm = g x k2
Fg
x k2
g
1 lb
386.4
x (2 in)2
Jm =
Jm = .0104 in-lb-sec2
IMPERIAL
T = Jm x α x SF
METRIC
T = Jm x α x SF
T = .0146 x 25.2 x 2 = .74 in-lbs
T = .00166 x 25.2 x 2 = .084 N-m
Total T = 4.5 + .74 = 5.24 in-lbs
Total T = .51 + .084 = .594 N-m
Review torque chart on page 3A-7 for 87 psi [6 bar] to select
4.45 N
x (.0508 m)2
9.81
application:
Jm = .00117 N-m-sec2
RECTANGULAR PLATE
IMPERIAL
METRIC
Jm =
Fg a2+b2
g x 12
Jm =
on page 3A-14.
ω = .0175 x rotation angle (deg)
Fg a2+b2
g x 12
2
IMPERIAL
KE = .5 x .025 x 6.32 x 4
KE = 1.98 in-lbs
2
Jm = .0146 in-lb-sec
Jm = .00165 N-m-sec
Total Jm
= .0146+.0104=.025 in-lb-sec2
Total Jm
= .00165+.00117=.00282N-m-sec2
180° = 25.2 rad/sec2
(.5 sec)2
be handled, or conversely, a smaller rotary unit can be used.
c) Use the KE Energy table on page 3A-14 to select the
requirements: 63 mm plain, 50 mm with shock pads, and
40 mm with cushions.
POINT LOAD
IMPERIAL
T = [(Jm x α)+(Fg x k)] x 2
METRIC
KE = .5 x .00282 x 6.32 x 4
KE = .224 N-m
IF SHOCKS ARE USED:
IMPERIAL
METRIC
KE = .5 x .025 x 6.32 x 1.35 KE = .5 x .00282 x 6.32 x 1.35
KE = .66 in-lbs
KE = .076 N-m
α = .035 x rotational angle (deg)
[time (sec)]2
α = .035 x
ω = .0175 x 180° = 6.3 rad/sec
.5 sec
2
2
Jm = 7.55 x (.1524) +(.0508)
9.81
12
2
2
Jm = 1.698 x 6 +2
386.4
12
1lb
[4.45 N]
METRIC
T = [(Jm x α)+(Fg x k)] x SF
T = [(.0140 x 25.2) + (1 x 2)] x 2 T = [(.00117 x 25.2) + (4.45 x .0508)] x 2
T = 4.5 in-lbs
T = .51 N-m
3A-17
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/rl
3A
RECTANGULAR PLATE
WEIGHT
MASS
POINT LOAD
IMPERIAL
180°/.5 sec
Steel Plate
1.698 lb
ROTARY ACTUATORS
INDEX:
Ordering Data
Page 3B-2
SERIES RA
Benefits
Page 3B-3
Dimensions
Pages 3B-4 and 3B-5
High Load and Stopping Capacity, Zero Backlash
Engineering Data
Pages 3B-6 and 3B-7
Rotary Actuator
Selection
Pages 3B-12 to 3B-13
Application Example
Page 3B-14 to 3B-15
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/ra
3B-1
3B
Options
Pages 3B-8 to 3B-11
www.phdinc.com/ra
TYPE
S - 150 psi [10 bar] Air Max.
BORE SIZE
20 mm (.78")
25 mm (1.0")
32 mm (1.25")
40 mm (1.5")
50 mm (2.0")
PORT CONTROL
PB - Both directions
PC - Counterclockwise
PW - Clockwise
OUTPUT TYPES
Q10 - Output hub
Q19 - Output hub with hollow pinion shaft
(Available on 32 mm–50 mm units only)
Q22 - Splined output shaft only
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
DESIGN NO.
1 - Imperial
5 - Metric
SHOCK ABSORBER CHART
PHD SHOCK
BORE
ABSORBER NO.
SIZE
56722-01
20 mm
56722-02
25 mm
56722-03
32 mm
56722-04
40 mm
56722-05
50 mm
SERIES
A - Standard Duty
!
Options may affect unit length.
See unit dimension and options
pages for adders.
ANGLE OF ROTATION
45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, 225°, 270°
Shock absorbers must be ordered
separately for -GS, -GT, and -GU options.
225° and 270° units are standard
shock ready.
SHOCK ABSORBER
NB - Shock installed both directions
NC - Shock installed counterclockwise
NW - Shock installed clockwise
GS - Shock ready both directions
GT - Shock ready counterclockwise
GU - Shock ready clockwise
CUSHION CONTROL
DB - Cushion both directions
DC - Cushion counterclockwise
DW - Cushion clockwise
R A S 1 20 x 180 – PB – NB – E – Q10
PRODUCT
R - Rotary Actuator
TO ORDER SPECIFY:
Product, Series, Type, Design No., Bore Size,
Angle of Rotation, and Options.
SWITCH READY
E - Hall Effect magnets for Series 5360 Switch
I - Magnetoresistive magnets for Series 5360 Switch
M - Reed magnets for Series 5360 Switch
Switches must be ordered separately. See page 3B-9.
3B
ORDERING DATA: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS
3B-2
SOLUTIONS FOR
BENEFITS: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS
■
Series RA Rotary Actuators are available in five sizes and six
standard rotations with torques ranging to 150 in-lb at 100 psi
[17 Nm at 7 bar] to cover a wide range of applications.
■
All units have zero backlash at ends of rotation for precise
rotary positioning.
■
The high strength steel alloy rack and one-piece pinion shaft
are designed and tested to operate for a minimum of 10 million
maintenance-free cycles.
■
Free floating pistons with pressure and wear compensating
seals provide long life and low friction with a 5 psi [0.3 bar]
breakaway pressure.
■
Oversize sealed ball bearings and large pinion shafts
ensure shaft stability under heavy loading and high load
stopping ability.
■
Built-in standard angle adjustments, of +10°, -45° on each
nominal angle rotation, make it easy to adjust to specific
rotation requirements. This provides a total range of actuator
rotations from 0° to 280°. (+5° -22-1/2° from each end)
■
Mounting patterns on three surfaces provide flexibility in
design and unit mounting.
■
Units with rotations of 180° or less have all control
adjustments and ports on top of the actuator saving space and
easing accessibility.
■
Optional built-in hydraulic shock absorbers provide smooth
deceleration of external loads and allow for greater load
stopping capacity.
■
Optional built-in flow controls save space and provide constant
and accurate control of the rotation speed.
■
Optional built-in adjustable cushions reduce end-of-rotation
shock and increase the unit's stopping capacity.
■
Optional hubbed pinion shaft provides a flat mounting surface
with a four bolt pattern for easy mounting of tooling and
accessories to the actuator's shaft.
■
Miniature PHD Proximity Switches mount easily into slots in
the actuator's body for interfacing with an electrical controller.
Units can be specified for use with PHD’s Miniature Reed or
Hall Effect Switches.
■
Series RA Rotary Actuators are available in both metric
and imperial versions allowing flexibility in design for a
world market.
SOLUTIONS FOR
3B
BENEFITS
SPECIFICATIONS
PISTON SEALS
PISTONS
PINION SHAFTS
RACKS
END CAPS
BODY
BEARINGS
PORTS
LUBRICATION
WORKING PRESSURE
STANDARD ROTATIONS
OPTIONS
20 mm-50 mm
One Block Vee per Piston
Free Floating, Acetal Material
Alloy Steel
Hardcoated Aluminum
NPT [BSP]
45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, 225°, 270°
Port Controls®, Cushions,
Output Hub, Shock Absorber,
Magnets for Proximity Switches
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/ra
3B-3
DIMENSIONS: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS
45°, 90°, 135°, or 180° ROTATION UNITS
G*
A
Y
F
4X THRU AND C'BORE
FOR L SHCS
Y/2
2X X NPT [BSP] PORT
.437
[11.10]
T
J
SEAT FOR #204
WOODRUFF KEY
S
FOR RAS120 ONLY
R/2
R
PA
2X ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
3B
D MAX
O
K
Ø NB ± .0005 x NC DP
[Ø NB ± 0.013] 1X FRONT & BACK
Q/2
Z
U
KEYWAY FOR
W KEY
Q
H
ØV
C
B
MA – 4X FRONT
MB – 4X BACK
E/2
E
SLOT FOR OPTIONAL
HALL/REED SWITCH
NOTES:
1) *G DIMENSION INCREASES WITH CUSHION OPTION. SEE PAGE 3B-8.
2) KEYWAY SHOWN AT MID-ROTATION
3) NUMBERS IN [ ] ARE FOR METRIC UNITS AND ARE IN mm.
BORE SIZE
NOMINAL ROTATION
45° OR 90°
135° OR 180°
45° OR 90°
135° OR 180°
45° OR 90°
135° OR 180°
45° OR 90°
135° OR 180°
45° OR 90°
135° OR 180°
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
L
#10
[M5]
#10
[M5]
1/4
[M6]
5/16
[M8]
3/8
[M10]
BORE SIZE
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
BORE SIZE
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
T
1.496
[38.0]
1.772
[45.0]
2.165
[55.0]
2.756
[70.0]
3.071
[78.0]
A
3.524 [89.5]
3.760 [95.0]
3.819 [97.0]
4.508 [114.5]
4.606 [117.0]
5.650 [143.5]
5.256 [133.5]
6.476 [164.5]
6.300 [160.0]
7.343 [186.5]
MA
10-24 x .281
[M5 x 0.8 x 7]
10-24 x .285
[M5 x 0.8 x 7]
1/4-20 x .250
[M6 x 1.0 x 7.5]
5/16-18 x .437
[M8 x 1.25 x 12]
3/8-16 x .375
[M10 x 1.5 x 10]
U
.04
[1.0]
.04
[1.0]
.05
[1.2]
.03
[0.8]
.07
[1.8]
3B-4
V
.375/.374
[10 (h8)]
.4727/.4714
[12 (h8)]
.625/.624
[16 (h8)]
.750/.749
[17 (h8)]
.875/.874
[22 (h8)]
B
.807
[20.5]
.983
[25.0]
1.161
[29.5]
1.516
[38.5]
1.674
[42.5]
C
1.831
[46.5]
2.224
[56.5]
2.697
[68.5]
3.366
[85.5]
3.918
[99.5]
D
.604
[15.34]
.724
[18.39]
.920
[23.37]
.977
[24.82]
1.191
[30.25]
MB
10-24 x .375
[M5 x 0.8 x 12.5]
10-24 x .500
[M5 x 0.8 x 12.5]
1/4-20 x .500
[M6 x 1.0 x 15]
5/16-18 x .750
[M8 x 1.25 x 20]
3/8-16 x .750
[M10 x 1.5 x 20]
NB
1.3785
[35.014]
1.4572
[37.013]
1.8509
[47.013]
2.0477
[52.012]
2.4414
[62.012]
W KEY
SEE ABOVE
[3 mm SQ. x 20 mm]
1/8 SQ. x 1.125
[4 mm SQ. x 25 mm]
3/16 SQ. x 1.250
[5 mm SQ. x 32 mm]
3/16 SQ. x 1.500
[5 mm SQ. x 35 mm]
3/16 SQ. x 1.750
[6 mm SQ. x 45 mm]
X NPT [BSP]
1/8
[1/8]
1/8
[1/8]
1/8
[1/8]
1/8
[1/8]
1/4
[1/4]
NC
.085
[2.16]
.080
[2.03]
.100
[2.54]
.115
[2.92]
.125
[3.17]
Y
1.004
[25.5]
1.124
[28.5]
1.458
[37.0]
1.598
[40.6]
1.984
[50.4]
E
1.574
[40.0]
1.772
[45.0]
2.166
[55.0]
2.558
[65.0]
2.952
[75.0]
F
.394
[10.0]
.394
[10.0]
.394
[10.0]
.472
[12.0]
.472
[12.0]
O
2.047
[52.0]
2.362
[60.0]
2.835
[72.0]
3.544
[90.0]
3.976
[101.0]
G
.768
[19.5]
.768
[19.5]
.768
[19.5]
.945
[24.0]
.945
[24.0]
PA
1.000
[25.0]
1.250
[30.0]
1.500
[40.0]
1.750
[42.5]
2.000
[55.0]
H
1.712
[43.5]
2.087
[53.0]
2.559
[65.0]
3.228
[82.0]
3.720
[94.5]
Q
1.180
[30.0]
1.378
[35.0]
1.772
[45.0]
2.164
[55.0]
2.362
[60.0]
J
.91
[23.0]
1.01
[25.5]
1.18
[30.0]
1.57
[39.75]
1.74
[44.25]
R
2.166
[55.0]
2.362
[60.0]
2.952
[75.0]
3.346
[85.0]
3.936
[100.0]
K
1.732
[44.0]
1.929
[49.0]
2.264
[57.5]
3.071
[78.0]
3.346
[85.0]
S
.276
[7.0]
.295
[7.5]
.335
[8.5]
.394
[10.0]
.452
[11.5]
Z
.06
[1.5]
.08
[2.0]
.08
[2.0]
.08
[2.0]
.10
[2.5]
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/ra
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
DIMENSIONS: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS
225° or 270° ROTATION UNITS
G*
A
4X THRU AND
C'BORE FOR L SHCS
F
FF
ACROSS FLATS
2X X NPT [BSP] PORT
.437
[11.10]
T
J
SEAT FOR #204
WOODRUFF KEY
S
FOR RAS120 ONLY
R/2
O
K
PA
Ø NB ± .0005 x NC DP
[Ø NB ± 0.013] 1X FRONT & BACK
D MAX
Z
U
KEYWAY FOR
W KEY
Q/2
Q
3B
R
H
ØV
C
B
E/2
2X ANGLE
ADJUSTMENT
SLOT FOR OPTIONAL
HALL/REED SWITCH
MA – 4X FRONT
MB – 4X BACK
E
NOTES:
1) *G DIMENSION INCREASES WITH CUSHION OPTION. SEE PAGE 3B-8.
2) KEYWAY SHOWN AT MID-ROTATION
BORE SIZE
NOMINAL ROTATION
20 mm
225° OR 270°
25 mm
225° OR 270°
32 mm
225° OR 270°
40 mm
225° OR 270°
50 mm
225° OR 270°
BORE SIZE
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
BORE SIZE
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
L
#10
[M5]
#10
[M5]
1/4
[M6]
5/16
[M8]
3/8
[M10]
T
1.496
[38.0]
1.772
[45.0]
2.165
[55.0]
2.756
[70.0]
3.071
[78.0]
A
4.390
[111.5]
5.295
[134.5]
6.693
[170.0]
7.736
[196.5]
8.917
[226.5]
MA
10-24 x .281
[M5 x 0.8 x 7]
10-24 x .285
[M5 x 0.8 x 7]
1/4-20 x .250
[M6 x 1.0 x 7.5]
5/16-18 x .437
[M8 x 1.25 x 12]
3/8-16 x .375
[M10 x 1.5 x 10]
U
.04
[1.0]
.04
[1.0]
.05
[1.2]
.03
[0.8]
.07
[1.8]
V
.375/.374
[10 (h8)]
.4727/.4714
[12 (h8)]
.625/.624
[16 (h8)]
.750/.749
[17 (h8)]
.875/.874
[22 (h8)]
B
.807
[20.5]
.983
[25.0]
1.161
[29.5]
1.516
[38.5]
1.674
[42.5]
C
1.831
[46.5]
2.224
[56.5]
2.697
[68.5]
3.366
[85.5]
3.918
[99.5]
E
1.574
[40.0]
1.772
[45.0]
2.166
[55.0]
2.558
[65.0]
2.952
[75.0]
D
4.39
[111.5]
5.06
[128.5]
5.87
[149.1]
6.66
[169.1]
7.32
[186.0]
MB
10-24 x .375
[M5 x 0.8 x 12.5]
10-24 x .500
[M5 x 0.8 x 12.5]
1/4-20 x .500
[M6 x 1.0 x 15]
5/16-18 x .750
[M8 x 1.25 x 20]
3/8-16 x .750
[M10 x 1.5 x 20]
NB
1.3785
[35.014]
1.4572
[37.013]
1.8509
[47.013]
2.0477
[52.012]
2.4414
[62.012]
W KEY
SEE ABOVE
[3 mm SQ. x 20 mm]
1/8 SQ. x 1.125
[4 mm SQ. x 25 mm]
3/16 SQ. x 1.250
[5 mm SQ. x 32 mm]
3/16 SQ. x 1.500
[5 mm SQ. x 35 mm]
3/16 SQ. x 1.750
[6 mm SQ. x 45 mm]
X NPT [BSP]
1/8
[1/8]
1/8
[1/8]
1/8
[1/8]
1/8
[1/8]
1/4
[1/4]
NC
.085
[2.16]
.080
[2.03]
.100
[2.54]
.115
[2.92]
.125
[3.17]
Z
.06
[1.5]
.08
[2.0]
.08
[2.0]
.08
[2.0]
.10
[2.5]
F
.394
[10.0]
.394
[10.0]
.394
[10.0]
.472
[12.0]
.472
[12.0]
O
2.047
[52.0]
2.362
[60.0]
2.835
[72.0]
3.544
[90.0]
3.976
[101.0]
G
.768
[19.5]
.768
[19.5]
.768
[19.5]
.945
[24.0]
.945
[24.0]
PA
1.000
[25.0]
1.250
[30.0]
1.500
[40.0]
1.750
[42.5]
2.000
[55.0]
H
1.712
[43.5]
2.087
[53.0]
2.559
[65.0]
3.228
[82.0]
3.720
[94.5]
Q
1.181
[30.0]
1.378
[35.0]
1.772
[45.0]
2.164
[55.0]
2.362
[60.0]
J
.91
[23.0]
1.01
[25.5]
1.18
[30.0]
1.57
[39.75]
1.74
[44.25]
R
2.166
[55.0]
2.362
[60.0]
2.952
[75.0]
3.346
[85.0]
3.936
[100.0]
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
S
.276
[7.0]
.295
[7.5]
.335
[8.5]
.394
[10.0]
.452
[11.5]
FF
.39
[10.0]
.47
[12.0]
.71
[18.0]
.91
[23.0]
.91
[23.0]
SOLUTIONS FOR
K
1.732
[44.0]
1.929
[49.0]
2.264
[57.5]
3.071
[78.0]
3.346
[85.0]
www.phdinc.com/ra
3B-5
ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS
RA SPECIFICATIONS
BORE
SIZE
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
GEAR RACKS
45°-180°
225°-270°
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
PISTON DIAMETER
mm
in
20
.79
25
.98
32
1.26
40
1.57
1.97
50
DISPLACEMENT
in3/DEG. ROT.
mm3/DEG. ROT.
32.77
.002
65.55
.004
114.71
.007
229.42
.014
442.45
.027
ROTATIONAL RATES
All Series RA Rotary Actuators have a maximum pressure
rating of 150 psi [10 bar] with a 5 psi [0.3 bar] breakaway pressure.
The average speed of rotation for units with no load is 180°
in .05 second for 20 mm, 25 mm, and 32 mm bore units, 180° in
.06 second for 40 mm bore units, and 180° in .075 second for
50 mm bore units.
3B
PISTON AREA
in2
mm2
.49
314.19
.76
490.32
1.25
804.19
1.95
1256.64
3.04
1963.48
Standard Series RA Rotary Actuators are recommended for use
in temperatures from -20° to +180°F [-28° to +82°C]. Consult PHD
for temperatures beyond this range.
LUBRICATION
All units are permanently lubricated at assembly for service
using non-lubricated air. Life can be extended by periodic lubrication
of the rack and pinion using high grade bearing grease and by using
lubricated air.
CONTROLS
Control of pinion shaft speed is extremely important as inertia
force is a function of rotational speed and distance from load to
output shaft center. PHD's built-in flow controls, cushions, and
shock absorbers should be considered when inertial loads are
applied. See pages 3B-8 through 3B-10 for information on Series
RA Rotary Actuator controls. See pages 3B-12 through 3B-13 for
information on load stopping capacity.
BEARING LOADS TABLE
BACKLASH
All units have 0 degrees of backlash at ends of rotation.
BORE
SIZE
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
ANGLE OF ROTATION
Standard angles of rotation are 45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, 225°, and
270°. Consult PHD for other rotation requirements. All units have
built-in angle adjustments providing +10°, -45°.
The total rotational tolerance of the Series RA Rotary Actuator
is +10°, -0° on the nominal specified rotation.
AXIAL
BEARING LOAD
CAPACITY
lb
N
431
97
524
118
809
182
1054
237
1445
325
RADIAL
BEARING LOAD
CAPACITY
lb
N
376 1672
453 2015
640 2846
746 3318
966 4296
DISTANCE
BETWEEN
BEARINGS
in
mm
34.0
1.34
40.9
1.61
49.3
1.94
65.0
2.56
73.6
2.90
INPUT
PRESSURE
bar
psi
2.7
40
3.4
50
4.1
60
4.8
70
5.5
80
6.2
90
6.8
100
8.2
120
8.9
130
9.6
140
10
150
20 mm
in-lb
Nm
3.9
.44
4.9
.55
5.8
.65
6.8
.77
7.8
.88
8.8
.99
9.7
1.1
11
1.3
12
1.4
13
1.5
14
1.6
BORE SIZE
32 mm
Nm
in-lb
16
1.8
20
2.3
24
2.8
29
3.2
33
3.7
37
4.2
41
4.6
49
5.6
54
6.1
58
6.5
62
7.0
25 mm
in-lb
Nm
7.6
.85
9.5
1.0
11
1.2
13
1.5
15
1.7
17
1.9
19
2.1
22
2.5
24
2.7
26
3.0
28
3.2
40 mm
Nm
in-lb
31
3.5
38
4.4
46
5.2
54
6.1
62
7.0
70
7.9
77
8.8
93
10
101
11
109
12
116
13
50 mm
in-lb
Nm
60
6.8
76
8.6
91
10
106
12
121
13
136
15
152
17
182
20
197
22
213
24
228
25
3B-6
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/ra
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS
ROTARY ACTUATOR WEIGHT TABLE
BORE
SIZE
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
TYPE OF
UNIT
STANDARD
WITH SHOCK OPTION -NB
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
45° OR 90°
kg
lb
.77
1.8
.88
2.0
1.08
2.4
1.29
2.9
1.92
4.3
2.33
5.2
3.47
7.7
4.30
9.5
5.22
11.6
6.47
14.3
NOMINAL ROTATION
135° OR 180°
kg
lb
.77
1.8
.89
2.1
1.24
2.8
1.46
3.3
2.19
4.9
2.63
5.8
3.96
8.8
4.84
10.7
5.78
12.8
7.09
15.7
225° OR 270°
lb
kg
2.3
1.02
2.4
1.09
3.6
1.60
3.9
1.75
6.5
2.94
7.1
3.19
11.8
5.31
5.89
13.0
8.01
17.7
8.59
19.0
BORE
SIZE
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
3B
CUSHION AND OUTPUT HUB WEIGHTS
ADDER WITH
HUB OPTION -Q10 OR -Q19
kg
lb
.01
.03
.01
.03
.02
.04
.05
.12
.11
.23
ADDER WITH
CUSHION OPTION -DB
lb
kg
.3
.13
.4
.16
.6
.24
.8
.34
1.1
.47
STANDARD ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
All PHD Series RA Rotary Actuators are supplied as standard with
built-in adjustable angle stops. Together these mechanical positive
stops provide an adjustment range of +10°, -45° on each nominal angle
of rotation (see Table 1). (+5°, -22-1/2° from each end.)
Units with rotations of 180° or less utilize adjusting screws in the
top of the actuator which stop against a stop cam attached to the pinion
shaft (see Illustration A). Units with rotations of 225° and 270° use
angle adjustment screws located in the end caps which stop against the
auxiliary lower rack (see Illustration B). When 225° or 270° units are
ordered with optional shock absorbers, the shock absorbers double as
the angle adjustment screws.
The ability to adjust over such a wide range eliminates
the need to order special units for specific angles of rotation. The range
of nominal rotations and the +10°, -45° adjustments provide a total
rotation range of 0° to 280° across the Series RA Rotary Actuator line.
NOTE: Cushions are effective for approximately the last 40°
of rotation each direction. The cushion angle will decrease by the
same amount that the nominal rotation is reduced by the angle
adjustment. Consult PHD for non-standard angles of rotation if
cushions are required.
TABLE 1
ROTATION ORDERED
45°
90°
135°
180°
225° or 270°
ILLUSTRATION A
0°-180° ROTATIONS
ILLUSTRATION B
181°-270° ROTATIONS
UPPER RACK OMITTED FOR CLARITY
STOP CAM
SOLUTIONS FOR
STANDARD ADJUSTMENT RANGE
0° through 55°
45° through 100°
90° through 145°
135° through 190°
180° through 280°
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/ra
3B-7
OPTIONS: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS
PB
PC
PORT CONTROL®
PW
3B
G
PORT CONTROL®
BOTH DIRECTIONS
F
PORT CONTROL
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
AA
PORT CONTROL
CLOCKWISE
PORT CONTROL®
CLOCKWISE DIRECTION
RASx20, RASx25, RASx32
PHD Port Control® is a built-in flow control valve for controlling
the speed through complete shaft rotation. The Port Control® is
based on the “meter-out” principle and features an adjustable needle
in a cartridge with an external check seal. The self-locking needle
has micrometer threads and is adjustable under pressure. It
determines the orifice size which controls the exhaust flow rate of
the actuator. The check seal expands while air is exhausting from
the actuator, forcing the air to exhaust past the adjustable needle.
The check seal collapses to allow a free flow of incoming air. The
PHD Port Control® saves space and eliminates the cost of fittings
and installation for external flow control valves.
G
PORT CONTROL
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
F
PORT CONTROL
CLOCKWISE
AA
NOTE: Port Control may not be effective below operating
pressures of 10 psi [.7 bar].
BORE SIZE
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
F
.394 [10.0]
.394 [10.0]
.394 [10.0]
.472 [12.0]
.472 [12.0]
G
.768 [19.5]
.768 [19.5]
.768 [19.5]
.945 [24.0]
.945 [24.0]
RASx40 & RASx50
AA
.374 [9.5]
.374 [9.5]
.374 [9.5]
.965 [24.5]
1.083 [27.5]
CUSHION
CLOCKWISE
G
DB
CUSHION BOTH DIRECTIONS
DC
CUSHION
DW
F
AA
CUSHION
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
CUSHION
CLOCKWISE DIRECTION
BORE SIZE
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
PHD Cushions allow for smooth deceleration at the end of
rotation. When the cushion operates, the remaining volume of air in
the actuator must exhaust past an adjustable needle, which controls
the deceleration of the pinion shaft. The effective length of the
cushion is approximately 40° of rotation at the end of full nominal
rotation. The use of angle adjustment screws to reduce the angle of
rotation has a direct effect on the length of cushion engagement.
Example: 5° of angle reduction on one end will reduce cushion
engagement by 5° on that end of rotation. See pages 3B-12 through
3B-13 for information on unit stopping capacity with adjustable
cushions.
3B-8
F
.315 [8.0]
.315 [8.0]
.315 [8.0]
.394 [10.0]
.394 [10.0]
G
1.280 [32.5]
1.280 [32.5]
1.280 [32.5]
1.378 [35.0]
1.378 [35.0]
AA
.118 [3.0]
.118 [3.0]
.118 [3.0]
—
—
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/ra
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
PORT CONTROL® AND CUSHION LOCATIONS
G
PORT CONTROL
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
CUSHION
CLOCKWISE
G
CUSHION
CLOCKWISE
F
PORT
CONTROL
CLOCKWISE
AA
AA
PORT CONTROL
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
CUSHION
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
CUSHION
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
PORT CONTROL
CLOCKWISE
RASx20, RASx25, RASx32, RASx40
BORE SIZE
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
F
.335 [8.5]
.335 [8.5]
.335 [8.5]
.394 [10.0]
.453 [11.5]
RASx50
G
AA
1.280 [32.5] .374 [9.5]
1.280 [32.5] .374 [9.5]
1.280 [32.5] .374 [9.5]
1.378 [35.0] .453 [11.5]
1.378 [35.0] 1.083 [27.5]
I
for use with PHD Magnetoresistive Switches. These switches mount
easily to the actuator using the “T” slot in the top of the body.
E
PART NO.
53605-1-02
53606-1-02
53625-1
53626-1
for use with PHD Series 5360 Miniature Hall Effect Switches. These
the body.
PART NO.
53603-1-02
53604-1-02
53623-1
53624-1
COLOR
Yellow
Red
Yellow
Red
MAGNETORESISTIVE SWITCHES
DESCRIPTION
NPN (Sink) 4.5-24 VDC, 2 meter cable
PNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC, 2 meter cable
NPN (Sink) 4.5-24 VDC, Quick Connect
PNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC, Quick Connect
COLOR
Black
Orange
Black
Orange
DESCRIPTION
NPN 6-24 VDC, 2 m cable
PNP 6-24 VDC, 2 m cable
NPN 6-24 VDC, Quick Connect
PNP 6-24 VDC, Quick Connect
FLATS OF STROKE
ADJUSTMENT NUTS MUST
BE ORIENTED AS SHOWN
REED SWITCHES
M
for use with PHD Series 5360 Miniature Reed Switches. These
the body.
PART NO.
53602-2-02
53609-2-02
53622-2
53629-2
SWITCHES MUST BE
ORIENTED AS SHOWN
FOR PROPER SENSING
.317 [8.0]
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
White Sink or Source Type 4.5-24 VDC, 2 meter cable
Green AC Type 110-120 VAC with Current Limit,
2 meter cable
White Sink or Source Type VDC, Quick Connect
Green AC Type 110-120 VAC, Quick Connect
with Current Limit
PHD Series 5360 Miniature Hall Effect and Reed Switches
are designed specifically to provide an input signal to various types
of programmable controllers or logic systems. See Switches and
Sensors section for information on the Series 5360 Miniature
Switches.
NOTE: When mounting miniature switches on the 20 mm and 25
mm bore units with rotations up to 180°, see the drawing above.
Minimum rotation on a 20 mm bore unit with two switches is 45°.
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/ra
3B-9
3B
F
BOTH DIRECTIONS
NC
NW
CLOCKWISE DIRECTION
SHOCK ABSORBER
(COUNTERCLOCKWISE)
PHD,
Inc.
NB
3B
CAP
The hydraulic shock absorber options are designed for the
maximum in deceleration control and rotational stopping ability. The
-NB, -NC, and -NW options provide the rotary actuator with the
hydraulic shock absorber installed in the appropriate location(s).
See pages 3B-12 through 3B-13 for details on unit stopping capacity
with built-in shock absorbers. Shock absorbers are nominally
effective for 45° of rotation each direction.
SHOCK ABSORBER
(CLOCKWISE)
SHOCK LOCK NUT
A MAX
B ACROSS
FLATS
NOTE: The shock absorber doubles as the rotation adjustment
on units with rotations greater than 180°.
GS
BOTH DIRECTIONS
GT
CLOCKWISE DIRECTION
PH D
, I n c.
GU
SHOCK ABSORBER
MOUNTING HOLE
(COUNTERCLOCKWISE)
The -GS, -GT, and -GU options should only be used if the
shock absorber(s) is to be supplied separately from the rotary
actuator. These options provide a unit that has provisions for
installing hydraulic shock absorbers but have no shock absorbers
included. See pages 3B-12 through 3B-13 for details on unit
stopping capacity with built-in shock absorbers.
NOTE: The shock absorber doubles as the rotation adjustment
on units with rotations greater than 180°. Shock absorbers must be
installed in the rotary actuator prior to operating the unit. Operation
of units with shock absorber ready options without installed shocks
can damage the units and void any and all warranties. Only shock
SHOCK ABSORBER
MOUNTING HOLE (CLOCKWISE)
SHOCK ABSORBER
READY CAPS
absorbers specified by PHD should be used in Series RA Rotary
Actuators. The use of any other shock absorbers will affect actuator
performance and life expectancy.
KINETIC
SHOCK
PHD
ENERGY
ABSORBER
SHOCK
LOAD
WEIGHT
STROKE
BORE ABSORBER THREAD
in
Nm
in-lb
kg
lb
TYPE
NUMBER
mm
SIZE
3.81
.15
.12
1.1
.04
.09
M12 x 1
56722-01
20
6.35
.35
3.1
.12 .0540
56722-02* M14 x 1.5 .25
25
6.35
.57
5.0
.15
.34
56722-03 M20 x 1.5 .25
32
12.7
.5
1.70
15.0
.3
.67
56722-04* M25 x 1.5
40
12.7
.5
3.33
29.5
.3
.67
56722-05* M25 x 1.5
50
*These shock absorbers have an adjustment feature. (See startup procedure)
3B-10
A
MAX.
mm
in
31.5
1.24
56.6
2.23
61.2
2.41
85.7
3.38
87.4
3.44
B ACROSS
FLATS
mm
in
—
—
.44 11.1
18
.71
.88 22.3
.88 22.3
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/ra
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
Q10
OUTPUT HUB
B
This option provides an output hub in place of the conventional
pinion shaft. The hub includes four thru holes counterbored from
one surface and threaded from the other, allowing easy mounting of
fixturing, tooling, or other actuators requiring a flat surface area.
The hub is manufactured from alloy aluminum and comes
assembled to a specially designed low profile pinion shaft. The hub
can be removed to allow custom machining for specific mounting
needs. The hub hole pattern can be oriented in 22.5° increments.
Separate hubs are available in a kit complete with all hardware. See
chart bottom right.
HUB
CLAMP
SCREW
C
Inc.
PHD,
HUB
ØA
D
OUTPUT HUB WITH HOLLOW
PINION SHAFT
3B
Q19
This option provides an output hub with a hollow pinion shaft
in place of the standard pinion shaft. The hub has four thru holes
counterbored from one surface and threaded from the other,
allowing easy mounting of fixturing, tooling, or other actuators
requiring a flat surface area. The pinion shaft is hollow for feeding
pneumatic or electrical lines from the back of the rotary actuator to
the output hub. The hub is manufactured from alloy aluminum and
comes assembled to a specially designed low profile pinion shaft.
The hub can be removed to allow custom machining for specific
mounting needs. It can also be rotated in 22.5° rotations. Kinetic
energy ratings are reduced by 10% for this option.
NOTE: Available on 32 mm, 40 mm, and 50 mm units.
BORE SIZE
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
A
1.535
[39.0]
1.772
[45.0]
2.165
[55.0]
2.717
[69.0]
2.953
[75.0]
B
.374
[9.5]
.374
[9.5]
.492
[12.5]
.492
[12.5]
.748
[19.0]
C
.100
[2.5]
.100
[2.5]
.100
[2.5]
.100
[2.5]
.100
[2.5]
Ø H THRU UNIT
(–Q19 OPTION ONLY)
Ø J DOWEL PIN HOLE
(–Q10 OPTION ONLY)
E
F THREAD THRU C'BORE
FROM OPPOSITE SIDE FOR G SHCS
E
.787
[20.0]
.945
[24.0]
1.102
[28.0]
1.398
[35.5]
1.575
[40.0]
D
.787
[20.0]
.945
[24.0]
1.102
[28.0]
1.398
[35.5]
1.575
[40.0]
F
8-32
[M4 x 0.7]
10-32
[M5 x 0.8]
1/4-28
[M6 x 1.0]
1/4-28
[M8 x 1.25]
7/16-20
[M10 x 1.5]
G
#4
[M3]
#6
[M4]
#10
[M4]
#10
[M6]
3/8
[M8]
H
—
—
.276
[7.0]
.315
[8.0]
.394
[10.0]
J
.1264 x .25 DP
[3.21 x 6.4 DP]
.1264 x .25 DP
[3.21 x 6.4 DP]
.2514 x .50 DP
[6.39 x 12.7 DP]
.2514 x .50 DP
[6.39 x 12.7 DP]
.2514 x .50 DP
[6.39 x 12.7 DP]
-Q10 & -Q19 HUB INERTIA TABLE
BORE
SIZE
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
Jm TOTAL
kg-m2
in-lb-sec2
.000043831
4.96 x 10-6
.000085146
9.63 x 10-6
.000225389
2.55 x 10-5
.000731212
8.27 x 10-5
.001230561
1.39 x 10-4
HUB WEIGHT
kg
lb
.03
.06
.04
.08
.06
.14
.14
.30
.19
.42
HUB REPLACEMENT KITS
BORE
SIZE
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
FINISHED HUB KIT
METRIC
IMPERIAL
57651-2721-1 57658-2771-1
57652-2731-1 57659-2781-1
57653-2741-1 57660-2791-1
57654-2751-1 57661-2801-1
57655-2761-1 57662-2811-1
Rotational mass moment of inertia is based on hub plus
mounting screw.
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/ra
3B-11
ROTARY ACTUATOR SELECTION: SERIES RA
To select the appropriate RA rotary actuator, it is crucial to consider
several factors including bearing capacity, torque requirements and
stopping capacity of the actuator. The bearing capacities are listed
on page 3B-6. To determine the required torque to rotate the load in
a given time, the rotational mass moments of inertia, gravity, time
and acceleration must be taken into account. To stop an actuator, all
of the same required information for torque is needed plus kinetic
energy. Follow the steps below to select the appropriate RA
actuator.
1)
2)
3)
Determine the stopping capacity of the actuator by using the
equation given below.
KINETIC ENERGY BASIC EQUATION
KE = 1/2 Jm ω2 (Fa)
a)
Determine the average rotational velocity by using
equation A.
ROTATIONAL VELOCITY EQUATIONS
Review pages 3B-6 to make sure RA rotary actuator bearings
can withstand axial and radial bearing loads.
EQUATION A
Average Velocity (rad/sec)
Uniformly accelerated from rest
Determine the torque requirements of the actuator.
3B
a)
b)
Determine Mass Moment of Inertia.
mass moment of inertia will be the sum of the individual
calculations.
Determine the necessary acceleration.
Acceleration (α) =
Acceleration (α) =
c)
ω=
rad .0175 x Degrees of Rotation
=
sec Time of Rotation in seconds
b)
Using Jm from step 2a and velocity from step 3a,
calculate the kinetic energy of the application.
c)
Select an appropriate Fa factor from the table below.
UNIT
DESCRIPTION
plain unit
with cushion
with shocks
2 x (Rotation angle in radians)
.035 x (Rotation angle in degrees)
d)
Calculate the required torque.
torque will be the sum of the individual calculations.
Note: Torque calculations are theoretical, an appropriate
safety factor should be considered. PHD recommends a
minimum safety factor of 2 to account for friction loss,
airline and valve size, and attached accessories.
APPLICATION
FACTORS (Fa)
4
4
1.35
Use the KE Energy Table below to select appropriate
RL actuator.
KINETIC ENERGY TABLE
BORE
SIZE
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
KE MAX.
PLAIN UNIT
in-lb Nm
.21 .0237
.46 .0519
.96 .1085
1.74 .1966
2.13 .2407
KE MAX.
WITH CUSHION
in-lb Nm
.75 .0848
1.70 .1921
3.60 .4068
6.75 .7628
8.81 .9955
KE MAX. WITH
SHOCK ABSORBER
in-lb Nm
1.10 .1243
3.10 .3503
7.10 .8023
15.0 1.695
29.5 3.334
3B-12
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/ra
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
ROTARY ACTUATOR SELECTION: SERIES RA
IMPERIAL UNITS:
t = time (sec)
SF = Safety Factor
METRIC UNITS:
t = time (sec)
SF = Safety Factor
BALANCED LOADS
T = Jm x α x SF
Disk
Solid Sphere
Mounted on center
3B
Disk
Mounted on center
L
k
k
k
2
Jm = Fg x k
g
2
Jm =
LOAD ORIENTATION
Fg 1
x
x
4
g
2
( L3 + k )
Jm =
2
2 Fg
x x k2
5
g
Rectangular Plate
Rod
Mounted on center
Mounted on center
k dim is
radius
of rod
b
(with gravity)
a
a
2
2
Jm = Fg x a + 3k
12
g
2
2
Jm = Fg x a + b
g
12
(without gravity)
UNBALANCED LOADS
UNBALANCED LOADS
T = Jm x α x SF
2
T = Jm x α x SF
Rectangular Plate
Point Load
Mounted off center
Rod
Mounted off center
k dim is
radius
of rod
Fg2
Fg2
c
b
k
Fg
Fg1
Fg1
b
a
a
Fg
Jm =
x k2
g
SOLUTIONS FOR
2
2
2
2
Jm = Fg1 x 4a + c + Fg2 x 4b + c
g
g
12
12
Jm =
(Fg
g1
2
2
Fg2 (4b2 + 3k2)
x (4a + 3k ) +
x
g
12
12
)(
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/ra
)
3B-13
APPLICATION EXAMPLE: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS
EXAMPLE A-Disk rotating about centerline of unit.
k
IMPERIAL
180°/.10 sec
Aluminum Disk
.236 lb
LOAD
WEIGHT
MASS
PRESSURE
SAFETY FACTOR
METRIC
180°/.10 sec
Aluminum Disk
1.05 N
.107 Kg
6 bar
2
87 psi
2
1.00
[25.4]
k
1.75
[44.45]
3B
equations given on page 3B-13.
IMPERIAL
Jm =
IMPERIAL
KE = .5 x .000234 x 31.52 x 4
KE = .464 in-lbs
METRIC
k2
Fg
x
g
2
Jm =
Jm = .236 lb x (.875 in)
386.4
2
2
Jm =
Jm = .000234 in-lb-sec2
Fg
k2
x
g
2
1.05 N
(.0222m) 2
x
9.81
2
Jm = 2.64 x 10-5 N-m-sec2
IF SHOCKS ARE USED:
IMPERIAL
METRIC
KE = .5 x .000234 x 31.52 x 1.35 KE = .5 x 2.64 x 10-5 x 31.52 x 1.35
KE = .157 in-lbs
KE = .018 N-m
be handled, or conversely, a smaller unit can be used.
c) Use the KE Energy table on page 3B-12 to select the
requirements. 32 mm plain, 32 mm with shock pad,
or 25 mm with cushions.
α = .035 x rotational angle (deg)2
[rotational time (sec)]
α = .035 x
METRIC
KE = .5 x 2.64 x 10-5 x 31.52 x 4
KE = .052 N-m
180° = 630 rad/sec2
(.1 sec)2
IMPERIAL
T = Jm x α x SF
METRIC
T = Jm x α x 2
T = .000234 x 630 x 2 = .29 in-lbs
T = 2.64 x 10-5 x 630 x 2 = .03 N-m
Review torque chart on page 3B-6 for 87 psi [6 bar] to select
application:
on page 3B-12.
ω = rad/sec = .0175 x
rotation angle (deg)
ω = .0175 x 180° = 31.5 rad/sec
.1 sec
3B-14
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/ra
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
APPLICATION EXAMPLE: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS
EXAMPLE B-Combination of rectangular plate mounted on
center and a point load mounted off center.
6" [152.4] (a)
PRESSURE
SAFETY FACTOR
METRIC
180°/.5 sec
Steel Plate
7.55 N
.77 Kg
4.45 N
(50.8 mm off center)
6 bar
2
1 lb
(2" off center)
87 psi
2
2"
[50.8]
(b)
2"
[50.8]
(k)
RECTANGULAR PLATE
equations given on page 3B-13.
POINT LOAD
IMPERIAL
Jm =
Jm =
METRIC
Fg
Jm = g x k2
Fg
x k2
g
1 lb
386.4
x (2 in)2
Jm =
IMPERIAL
T = Jm x α x SF
METRIC
T = Jm x α x SF
T = .0146 x 25.2 x 2 = .74 in-lbs
T = .00166 x 25.2 x 2 = .084 N-m
Total T = 4.5 + .74 = 5.24 in-lbs
Total T = .51 + .084 = .594 N-m
Review torque chart on page 3B-6 for 87 psi [6 bar] to select
4.45 N
x (.0508 m)2
9.81
application:
Jm = .00117 N-m-sec2
RECTANGULAR PLATE
IMPERIAL
METRIC
Jm =
Fg a2+b2
g x 12
Jm =
on page 3B-12.
ω = .0175 x rotation angle (deg)
Fg a2+b2
g x 12
2
IMPERIAL
KE = .5 x .025 x 6.32 x 4
KE = 1.98 in-lbs
2
Jm = .0146 in-lb-sec
Jm = .00165 N-m-sec
Total Jm
= .0146+.0104=.025 in-lb-sec2
Total Jm
= .00165+.00117=.00282N-m-sec2
180° = 25.2 rad/sec2
(.5 sec)2
be handled, or conversly, a smaller rotary unit can be used.
c) Use the KE Energy table on page 3B-12 to select the
appropriate RA actuator. The following units satisfy the
requirements: 50 mm plain, 32 mm with cushions, or 20 with
shock absorbers.
POINT LOAD
IMPERIAL
T = [(Jm x α)+(Fg x k)] x 2
METRIC
T = [(Jm x α)+(Fg x k)] x SF
T = [(.0140 x 25.2) + (1 x 2)] x 2
T = [(.00117 x 25.2) + (4.45 x .0508)] x 2
T = 4.5 in-lbs
T = .51 N-m
SOLUTIONS FOR
METRIC
KE = .5 x .00282 x 6.32 x 4
KE = .224 N-m
IF SHOCKS ARE USED:
IMPERIAL
METRIC
KE = .5 x .025 x 6.32 x 1.35 KE = .5 x .00282 x 6.32 x 1.35
KE = .66 in-lbs
KE = .076 N-m
α = .035 x rotational angle (deg)
[time (sec)]2
α = .035 x
ω = .0175 x 180° = 6.3 rad/sec
.5 sec
2
2
Jm = 7.55 x (.1524) +(.0508)
9.81
12
2
2
Jm = 1.698 x 6 +2
386.4
12
1lb
[4.45 N]
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/ra
3B-15
3B
RECTANGULAR PLATE
WEIGHT
MASS
POINT LOAD
IMPERIAL
180°/.5 sec
Steel Plate
1.698 lb
3B
NOTES
3B-16
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/ra
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
ROTARY ACTUATORS
INDEX:
MINIATURE, AIR/OIL TANDEM, AND MULTI-POSITION
Miniature
(0180 & 0183 Series)
Pages 3C-2 to 3C-6
Series 1000-8000
Pages 3C-8 to 3C-12
Specialty Actuators Provide Solutions to
Unique Rotary Motion Requirements
Air/Oil Tandem
Multi-Position
Plumbing Schematics
SERIES 1000-8000
Start-up Procedure
Page 3C-34
Options
MINIATURE
ROTARY
ACTUATORS
SERIES 2000-8000
AIR/OIL TANDEM
SERIES 2000-8000
MULTI-POSITION
3C-1
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
3C
Engineering Data
ORDERING DATA: MINIATURE ROTARY ACTUATORS
UNITS WITH IMPERIAL SHAFTS AND KEYWAYS
TO ORDER SPECIFY:
Series, Size, Type, Design No.,
Options, and Seals.
SIZE
50 - 1/2" [12 mm] Bore
75 - 3/4" [19 mm] Bore
SEALS
1 - Buna-N (standard)
2 - Fluoro-Elastomer
018 0 75 1 - 1 - 0 1
3C
MODEL NUMBER
DESIGN NO.
1 - 018x75
3 - 018x50
SERIES NUMBER FOR PORT & MTG. HOLE TYPE
IMPERIAL METRIC POSITION
0
5
2 Position Actuator
3
8
3 Position Actuator -(Not
available on Size 50)
TYPE
1 - Single Rack
2 - Double Rack
T - Tandem
NOTE: 018x50,
018375, and 018875
are available in -2
double rack only.
OPTIONS
0 - No Sensor
3 - Sensor Transducer with
Transition Plate
NOTES:
1) Sensor must be used with a PHD Set Point
Module. See Switches and Sensors section
for information and ordering data.
UNITS WITH METRIC SHAFTS AND KEYWAYS
TO ORDER SPECIFY:
Series, Size, Type, Design No.,
Options, and Seals.
SIZE
50 - 1/2" [12 mm] Bore
75 - 3/4" [19 mm] Bore
MODEL NUMBER
DESIGN NO.
1 - 018x75x
3 - 0186502
SEALS
1 - Buna-N (standard)
2 - Fluoro-Elastomer
018 6 75 1 - 1 - 0 1
SERIES NUMBER FOR PORT & MTG. HOLE TYPE
IMPERIAL METRIC POSITION
—
6
2 Position Actuator
—
9
3 Position Actuator -(Not
available on Size 50)
TYPE
1 - Single Rack
2 - Double Rack
T - Tandem
NOTE: 018x50, and
018975 are available
in -2 double rack only.
OPTIONS
0 - No Sensor
3 - Sensor Transducer with
Transition Plate
NOTES:
1) Sensor must be used with a PHD Set Point
Module. See Switches and Sensors section
3C-2
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/018x
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
MINIATURE ROTARY ACTUATORS:
SERIES 018x502 & 018x75x
UNIT 018x752
■
PHD Miniature Rotary Actuators provide an infinite choice of
rotation between 0 and 180° in a very small package which is
ideal for small part orientation and turnover.
■
Two bore sizes, single and double rack, air-oil tandem, and 3
position models are offered for a wide range of application
requirements.
■
Standard external angle adjustments provide easy adjustment
of rotation between 0 and 180°.
■
Zero backlash at ends of rotation provide precise positioning of
attached load.
■
One piece pinion gear with sealed ball bearings give maximum
output shaft support, low friction, and long unit life.
■
Built-in flow controls are standard on most models for precise
control of rotation speed.
■
Optional Hall Effect Sensor/Set Point Module is available for
sensing multiple position throughout rotation.
SPECIFICATIONS
PISTON SEALS
PISTONS
PINION SHAFT
RACK
END CAPS
BODY
BEARINGS
PORTS
LUBRICATION
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
BACKLASH
ROTATION
FLOW CONTROLS
3C
BENEFITS
OUTPUT TORQUES TO 33 in-lb [3.7 Nm]
SERIES
018x50
018x75
(1 Per Piston) Block Vee
(2 Per Piston) Block Vee
Part of the Rack
Free Floating Aluminum
Alloy Steel
—
Zinc Plated Steel
Hardcoated Aluminum
(2) Steel Ball Bearings
10-32 [M5 x .8] with Barb Fittings
1/8 NPT [1/8 BSP]
Permanently Lubricated for Non-Lube Air
0° to 180° (Fully Adjustable)
0° at Both End Positions
180° Total
Not Available
Built-in Standard*
*Not available on 018375, 018875, or 018975 3 position units.
THEORETICAL TORQUE in-lb/psi [Nm/bar]
0180502
.065 [.09]
0180751
.11 [.18]
MODEL
0180752
.22 [.36]
018075T
.11 [.18]
0183752
.11 [.18]
3C-3
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/018x
3C-4
www.phdinc.com/018x
1.000
[25.4]
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
2
1.000
[25.4] SQ
3
4
3
4
2
1.000
[25.4]
4
2
1
1.500
[38.1]
1.000
[25.4]
2.125
[53.9]
.500
[12.7]
2.125 [53.9]
CHECK VALVE FITTING
2.125 [53.97]
.875
[22.2]
FOR SHAFT
DETAILS SEE
PAGE 3C-5 .250
[6.3]
4.250 [107.9]
2X REF CAP AREA
10-24 [M5 x .8]
THREAD x .250 [6.3] DP
4X FRONT & BACK
2X 1/8 NPT
[1/8 BSP]
.500
[12.7]
NOTES:
1) ALL DETAILS SHOW UNITS AT MID-ROTATION
.310
[7.9]
.810
[20.6]
AIR/OIL TANDEM UNIT
SERIES 018x75T
.310
[7.9]
.810
[20.6]
1
2.500 [63.4]
2.000 [50.8]
SINGLE RACK UNIT
SERIES 018x751
2.000
[50.8]
.500
[12.7]
4.750 [121]
2.375 [60.5]
BASIC DIMENSIONS
SERIES 018x75x & 018x752 UNITS
1.000
[25.4]
2X 1/8 NPT
[1/8 BSP]
2.000
[50.8]
1.000
[25.4]
.188
.500 [4.8]
[12.7]
1.500
[38.1]
2X THRU HOLE
FOR #8 [M4] SCREW
.190
[4.8]
.810
[20.6]
1.000
[25.4]
10-24 [M8 x .5]
THREAD x .375 [10] DP
4X TOP & BOTTOM
10-32 THREAD x .312
[M5 x .8] DP
.375 [9.53]
DOUBLE RACK UNIT
SERIES 018x752
1.500
[38.1]
2.000 [50.8]
ANGLE LIMITING SEGMENT
AUXILIARY MTG LOCATION
LIMITS ROTATION TO 45° FROM
MIDPOINT OF ROTATION
.937
[23.8]
3.62
[92]
.687
[17.4]
2.125 [53.8]
4.250 [107.6]
.750
[19]
ANGLE LIMITING SEGMENTS ALLOW
180° MAX ROTATION
0° MIN ROTATION
RESERVOIR ASSEMBLY IS
INCLUDED WITH UNIT AND
SHIPPED WITH 3 FEET
[1 m] OF FLEXIBLE TUBING
2X 1/8 NPT
[1/8 BSP]
SHAFT STOP PIN
3C
DIMENSIONS: SERIES 018x75x MINIATURE ROTARY ACTUATORS
SOLUTIONS FOR
PORT PRESSURIZED - C
FULL CW POSITION
III
R°
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
The PHD Three Position Rotary Actuator yields three output
shaft positions. Both the extreme positions and the midposition can
be adjusted in the field allowing a total rotation from 0° to 180° with
the midpoint anywhere between. Pressurizing port C provides full
counterclockwise rotation (position I). Pressurizing ports B1 and B2
at the same time causes the unit to rotate to position II and to hold
at that position. The racks are trapped by the piston and rods (B1
and B2) and hold the pinion from rotating, creating the positive
midposition. The midpoint adjustment stops allow the midpoint to
be set by changing the lengths that each piston and rod can stroke.
Position III is obtained by pressurizing port A driving the pinion
shaft to a full clockwise position.
Output positions can be selected in any sequence allowing the
actuator to stop at or pass by the midposition.
VIEW FROM FRONT OF UNIT
C
B2
3
1.000
[25.4]
4
LOCKING SCREWS
HOLD MIDPOINT
ADJUSTMENT IN PLACE
III
I
.310
[7.9]
2
2
1
4
II
SHAFT DETAIL FOR 018x75x
SERIES
A
018075x
+ .000
.375 - .001
018375x
018575x
+ .000
9.53 - .025
018875x
018675x
+ .0000
.3939 - .0003
018975x
+ .000
10 - .007
.500
[12.7]
NOTES:
1) ALL DETAILS SHOW UNITS AT MID-ROTATION
1.577 [40]
.906 [23]
DIA TYP
.750
[19]
2.500 [63.5]MAX
5.000 [127]
MIDPOINT
ADJUSTMENT
STOPS
B1
A
2.375 [60.3]
MULTI-POSITION UNIT
SERIES 018x752
3C
2X ADJUSTMENT CONTROL KNOB
FOR LOCATION OF THIRD POSITION
PORT PRESSURIZED - A
FULL CCW POSITION
I
I°
T°
II
PORTS PRESSURIZED
B1 & B2
A
B2
ANGLE ADJUSTMENTS
C
B1
2.125 [53.8]
4.250 [107.06]
1.000
[25.4]
DIMENSIONS: SERIES 018x752 3 POSITION MINIATURE
DIMENSION
B
.375
[9.53]
—
C
204
Woodruff
Keyway
3 mm SQ
x 16 mm LG
B
AØ
AØ
C KEYWAY
IMPERIAL SHAFTS
C KEYWAY
METRIC SHAFTS
3C-5
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/018x
3C-6
www.phdinc.com/018x
1.500 [38.1]
2.000 [50.8]
8-32 THREAD x .187 [5]
[M4 x .7] DP
4X FRONT & BACK
.750
[19]
SEE DETAIL
BELOW
.250
[6.3]
.750
[19]
2
1.000
[25.4]
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
C KEYWAY
NOTE: NUMBERS IN [ ] ARE FOR METRIC UNITS AND ARE IN mm.
IMPERIAL SHAFTS
AØ
B
C KEYWAY
METRIC SHAFTS
AØ
3
1
1.500 [38.1]
.594
[15]
SHAFT KEYWAY: SHOWN AT MID-ROTATION - WOODRUFF KEY IS SUPPLIED WITH ALL ACTUATORS
ROTATION: 180° MAXIMUM
PORT POSITIONS: INDICATED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS
PORT CONTROLS: NOT AVAILABLE ON SERIES 0183752, 0188752 & 018x502 UNITS. PORT CONTROLS ARE
STANDARD ON ALL OTHER ACTUATORS.
MTG. HOLES: CENTERED ON CENTERLINE OF ACTUATOR BODY
1.500
[38.1]
.750
[19]
3.000 [76.2]
1.500 [38.1]
2.219 [56.4]
1.109
[28.2]
DOUBLE RACK UNITS
SERIES 0180502
4
018650
018050
018550
SERIES
+ .000
6.0 - .007
—
[7.92]
.312
DIMENSION
B
+ .0000
.2362 - .0003
+ .000
6.35 - .025
A
+ .000
.250 - .001
8-32 THREAD x .250 [M4 x 6] DP
4X TOP & BOTTOM
6-32 THREAD
x .250 [M3 x 6] DP
2X 10-32 [M5 x .8] PORT BARB FITTING
FOR 1/16 [1.6] ID TUBE SUPPLIED
.312 [7.9]
3C
2 mm SQ
x 14 mm LG
203
Woodruff
Keyway
C
ANGLE LIMITING SEGMENTS
ALLOW 180° MAX ROTATION
0° MIN ROTATION
ANGLE LIMITING SEGMENT
AUXILIARY MTG LOCATION.
LIMITS ROTATION TO 45° FROM
MIDPOINT OF ROTATION
DIMENSIONS: SERIES 018x502 MINIATURE ROTARY ACTUATORS
SOLUTIONS FOR
3C
NOTES
3C-7
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/018x
www.phdinc.com/18000r
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
NOTES:
1) Sensor must be used with a PHD Set Point Module.
See Switches and Sensors section for information
and ordering data.
2) Mounting flanges must be ordered separately.
3) SAE Ports available. Consult PHD for sizes.
BUILT-IN METER OUT
FLOW CONTROL VALVE
P - Flow control both directions
P1 - Flow control clockwise
P2 - Flow control counterclockwise
PORT CONTROL©
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
A - Angle adjustment both ends
A1 - Angle adjustment clockwise 30°
A2 - Angle adjustment counterclockwise 30°
(20° for Series 8000)
SIZE NO.
SERIES
-32
1000 & 2000
-34
3000 & 4000
-38
5000 & 6000
-39
7000 & 8000
See Switches and Sensors
section for complete
ordering information.
PROXIMITY SWITCH
MOUNTING BRACKETS
ANGLE OF ROTATION
STANDARD ANGLES
45°, 90°, 180°, 270°, 360°, and 450°
For other available rotations,
consult PHD.
CUSHION OR SHOCK PAD
- Cushions both directions
- Cushion clockwise
- Cushion counterclockwise
- Shock Pads both directions
- Shock Pad clockwise
- Shock Pad counterclockwise
!
pages for adders.
(Cushions and Shock Pads are
not available on the same end of
actuator. Shock Pads are not
available for Hydraulic use.)
D
D1
D2
B
B1
B2
-
OPTIONS
Cross Key Pinion Shaft
Magnetic Piston for Hall Effect Switch
Shaft Seal both sides
Hollow Pinion Shaft (not available on type R21)
Port Position 1 on top rack
Port Position 3 on bottom rack
(Available on Series 2000, 4000, 6000, and 8000 only.)
Hall Sensor (Set Point Module is ordered separately)
for rotations not exceeding 180°
Preload Keyway Pinion Shaft
Counterclockwise Unidirectional Clutch
Magnetic Piston for Reed Switch
Pilot Valve Actuator (PVA)
Ports in Position 1*
Ports in Position 3*
Clockwise Unidirectional Clutch
SAE Ports (Hydraulic Units Only)
Ports in Position 4
Fluoro-Elastomer Seals
Close Tolerance Rotation, +30 minutes, -0
Electroless Nickel Plate
* Available on Series 1000, 3000, 5000, and 7000 only.
K L MN O Q R S T V WZ1 -
J -
C
E
G
H
I
IMPERIAL
TYPE
IMPERIAL
METRIC
R11A - Single Shaft Ext.
150 psi Air Max.
10 bar Air Max.
R21A - Double Shaft Ext.
150 psi Air Max.
10 bar Air Max.
R11H - Single Shaft Ext.
1500 psi Hyd. Max.
100 bar Hyd. Max.
R21H - Double Shaft Ext.
1500 psi Hyd. Max.
100 bar Hyd. Max.
SERIES
1 (000) 1" Bore Single Rack
2 (000) 1" Bore Double Rack
3 (000) 1-3/8" Bore Single Rack
4 (000) 1-3/8" Bore Double Rack
R1 1 A 2 180 - P - D - A - K-M-V
DESIGN NO.
1 - Imperial - Ports and mounting holes are imperial.
5 - Metric - Ports and mounting holes are metric.
Pinion shafts and keyway are imperial.
TO ORDER SPECIFY:
Type, Design No., Series, Angle of Rotation, and Options.
UNITS WITH IMPERIAL SHAFTS AND KEYWAY
3C
ORDERING DATA: SERIES 1000-8000 ROTARY ACTUATORS
3C-8
SOLUTIONS FOR
SOLUTIONS FOR
CAT-03
NOTES:
and ordering data.
2) Mounting flanges must be ordered separately.
R26H -
R16H -
R26A -
R16A -
BUILT-IN METER OUT
FLOW CONTROL VALVE
P - Flow control both directions
P1 - Flow control clockwise
P2 - Flow control counterclockwise
PORT CONTROL©
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
(20° for Series 8000)
SIZE NO.
SERIES
-32
1000 & 2000
-34
3000 & 4000
-38
5000 & 6000
-39
7000 & 8000
PROXIMITY SWITCH
MOUNTING BRACKETS
ANGLE OF ROTATION
STANDARD ANGLES
45°, 90°, 180°, 270°, 360°, and 450°
For other available rotations,
consult PHD.
CUSHION OR SHOCK PAD
- Cushions both directions
- Cushion clockwise
- Cushion counterclockwise
- Shock Pads both directions
- Shock Pad clockwise
- Shock Pad counterclockwise
!
pages for adders.
(Cushions and Shock Pads are
not available on the same end of
actuator. Shock Pads are not
available for Hydraulic use.)
D
D1
D2
B
B1
B2
3C
* Available on Series 1000, 3000, 5000, and 7000 only.
OPTIONS
E - Magnetic Piston for Hall Effect Switch
I - Port Position 1 on top rack
(Available on Series 2000, 4000, 6000, and 8000 only.)
M - Magnetic Piston for Reed Switch
O - Ports in Position 1*
Q - Ports in Position 3*
T - Ports in Position 4
V - Fluoro-Elastomer Seals
W - Close Tolerance Rotation, +30 minutes, -0
Z1 - Electroless Nickel Plate
METRIC
TYPE
METRIC
Single Shaft Ext.
10 bar Air Max.
Double Shaft Ext.
10 bar Air Max.
Single Shaft Ext.
100 bar Hyd. Max.
Double Shaft Ext.
100 bar Hyd. Max.
SERIES
3 (000) 1-3/8" Bore Single Rack
R1 6 A 2 180 - P - D - A - M-V
DESIGN NO.
6 - Metric - Ports and mounting holes, pinion
shafts and keyway are metric.
TO ORDER SPECIFY:
Type, Design No., Series, Angle of Rotation, and Options.
UNITS WITH METRIC SHAFTS AND KEYWAY
ORDERING DATA: SERIES 1000-8000 ROTARY ACTUATORS
(800) 624-8511
3C-9
ROTARY ACTUATORS: SERIES 1000-8000
BENEFITS
PHD Series 1000-8000 Rotary Actuators are pneumatically or
hydraulically powered providing output torques up to
31,800 in-lb [3595 Nm].
■
Rugged design and construction makes these actuators ideal
for heavy duty service in tough working environments.
■
Four bore sizes are available in single and double rack models
with standard rotations from 45° to 450°.
■
Free floating pistons with rack and pinion design eliminates
binding for low breakaway and long unit life.
■
Sealed shaft ball bearings provide long life and maximum shaft
stability for heavy payloads.
■
Available with a wide range of options including built-in flow
controls, cushions, angle adjustments, shock pads, and pinion
shaft options for specifying the exact actuator for your
application.
■
Simple construction allows easy field repairability.
3C
■
SPECIFICATIONS
PISTON SEALS
PISTONS
TIERODS
TUBE SEALS
PINION SHAFTS
RACK
END CAPS
BODY
TUBES
BEARINGS
PORTS
LUBRICATION
STANDARD ROTATIONS
OPTIONS
OUTPUT TORQUES TO 31,800 in-lb [3595 Nm]
TYPE
R1xA & R2xA
R1xH & R2xH
(3 Per Piston) Block Vee with Back-up Ring
High Tensile Steel
Square Cut
Alloy Steel
Zinc Plated Alloy Steel
Hardcoated Aluminum
Hardcoated Aluminum Hardcoated Aluminum on Series 1000-4000
—
Honed Steel on Series 5000-8000
NPT [BSP]
—
150 psi [10 bar] Air Max
1500 psi [100 bar] Hyd. Max.
45°, 90°, 180°, 270°, 360°, 450°
Port Controls®, Cushions, Angle Adjustment,
Magnetic Pistons, Fluoro-Elastomer Seals
1000
.38
[.63]
2000
.77
[1.28]
3000
1.1
[1.83]
SERIES
4000
5000
2.2
2.3
[3.66]
[3.82]
6000
4.7
[7.82]
7000
10.6
[17.61]
8000
21.2
[35.21]
3C-10
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
SOLUTIONS FOR
C/2
L
CAT-03
-A
-A1 -A2
I
II
I
II
D
2.000
3.000
4.000
5.000
E
1.500
2.000
2.500
3.000
F
.250
.344
.375
.469
G
.500
.688
.750
1.062
E
D
JA
.750
1.156
1.156
1.875
KA
1.375
1.875
2.250
3.500
L
1.437
2.094
2.281
3.625
-E
I & II
I & II
ZA MAX
OPTIONAL
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
LETTER DIMENSION
M
PA
O
NB
1/4-20 x .312 DP 1.125 x .056 DP 2.000 .875
5/16-18 x .500 DP 2.000 x .039 DP 3.000 1.875
3/8-16 x .625 DP 2.1654 x .052 DP 3.000 1.875
3/4-10 x 1.250 DP 3.3465 x .120 DP 5.000 3.500
-N
I & II
N/A
Q
2.000
3.000
3.500
5.000
V DIA
S
R
.500 .250
.625 .500
.750 .500
1.500 1.250
PORT PRESSURIZED - FULL CCW POSITION
C1 ON SERIES 1000, 3000, 5000, & 7000
OR C1 & E ON SERIES 2000, 4000, 6000, & 8000
I
3C
4
4
R
Q
W
V
.4998/.5003 1/8 x 1/16 x .625
.8748/.8753 3/16 x 3/32 x 1.500
1.124/1.125 1/4 x 1/8 x 1.500
1.749/1.750 3/8 x 3/16 x 3.000
TA
3
3
1
O
X
1/8
1/4
1/4
3/8
Y
2.849
3.953
4.563
6.080
Z
.0087
.013
.013
.026
OR C2 & A ON SERIES 2000, 4000, 6000, & 8000
II C2 ON SERIES 1000, 3000, 5000, & 7000
PORT PRESSURIZED - FULL CW POSITION
450
13.528
19.606
20.826
35.560
ZA
1.125
1.500
1.875
2.875
SPECIFIED BY R2xx
WHEN ORDERING
QUICK REFERENCE FOR: A + (T° x B)
DEGREE OF ROTATION
SERIES
45
90
180
270
360
1000 & 2000 6.481 7.264 8.830 10.396 11.962
3000 & 4000 9.076 10.246 12.586 14.926 17.266
5000 & 6000 10.296 11.466 13.806 16.146 18.486
7000 & 8000 14.500 16.840 21.520 26.200 30.880
U
.312
.562
.375
.750
S
2
2
U
T°
TA
1.500
2.000
2.000
2.500
W KEYWAY
PA
PORT & NEEDLE LOCATIONS
REFERENCED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS
-T
STANDARD
-O
-Q
PORT -P -D PORT -P -D PORT -P -D PORT -P -D
1 1
1 1
2 2
2 2
4
2
1
3
1 1
1 1
2 2
2 2
4
2
1
3
OPTION LOCATION REFERENCE
H
0.00
.250
.203
.437
A
C1
M THREAD
4X EACH FRONT,
BACK & BOTTOM
IV
II
NB +.001 DIA
-.000
LETTER OPTION
REFERENCED BY TUBE NUMBER
-D
-P
-B
-M
-B1
-B2 -D1 -D2 -P1 -P2
I & II
I
II
I
II
I
II
I & II
I
II
I
II
N/A
N/A
C
3.000
4.250
5.000
8.000
E
III
I
A + (T° x B)
SHAFT KEYWAY: SHOWN AT MID-ROTATION
PORT POSITION: INDICATED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS
-O & -Q AVAILABLE ON SERIES 1000, 3000, 5000, & 7000 ONLY
TUBES III & IV: INCLUDED ON SERIES 2000, 4000, 6000, & 8000 UNITS ONLY
CUSHIONS: SERIES 1000 & 2000 ACTUATORS
ADD 1/2" TO RESPECTIVE “A” AND “Y” DIMENSIONS FOR EACH CUSHION
ACTUATOR
TYPE
R1xA & R2xA
R1xH & R2xH
B
.0174
.026
.026
.052
KA SQ
G
C2
F
Y + (T° x Z)
IMPERIAL
A
SERIES
1000 & 2000 5.698
3000 & 4000 7.906
5000 & 6000 9.126
7000 & 8000 12.160
C
JA
X NPT
H
ZA MAX
DIMENSIONS: SERIES 1000-8000 ROTARY ACTUATORS
(800) 624-8511
3C-11
3C-12
C/2
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
A
145
201
232
302
E
III
B
C
D
E
F G H
0.44 76 51 38.1 6 13 0
0.66 108 76 50.8 9 17 6
0.66 127 102 63.5 10 19 5
1.33 203 127 76.2 12 27 11
KA SQ
I
JA
19
29
29
48
E
D
A
C1
L
M
36 M6 x 1.0 x 8
53 M8 x 1.0 x 13
58 M10 x 1.5 x 16
92 M20 x 2.5 x 32
-O & -Q AVAILABLE ON SERIES 1000, 3000, 5000, & 7000 ONLY
TUBES III & IV: INCLUDED ON SERIES 2000, 4000, 6000, & 8000 UNITS ONLY
CUSHIONS: SERIES 1000 & 2000 ACTUATORS
ADD 13 mm TO RESPECTIVE “A” AND “Y” DIMENSIONS FOR EACH CUSHION
-N
I & II
N/A
ZA MAX
OPTIONAL
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
LETTER DIMENSION
NB
O
PA
Q
R S
28.58 x 1.4 DP 50.8 22 50.8 13 6
50.80 x 1.0 DP 76.2 48 76.2 16 13
55.00 x 1.3 DP 76.2 48 88.9 19 13
85.00 x 3.0 DP 127.0 89 127.0 38 32
M THREAD
4X EACH FRONT,
BACK & BOTTOM
IV
II
NB +.025 DIA
-.000
S
2
2
U
TA
3
3
1
O
PORT PRESSURIZED - FULL CCW POSITION
C1 ON SERIES 1000, 3000, 5000, & 7000
OR C1 & E ON SERIES 2000, 4000, 6000, & 8000
I
R
Q
METRIC SHAFTS*
V
W
12.00/11.97 4 x 2.5 x 15
22.00/21.96 6 x 3.5 x 32
28.00/27.96 8 x 5 x 40
44.00/43.96 12 x 5 x 56
4
4
T°
OR C2 & A ON SERIES 2000, 4000, 6000, & 8000
II C2 ON SERIES 1000, 3000, 5000, & 7000
PORT PRESSURIZED - FULL CW POSITION
450
343.6
498.0
529.0
903.2
X
Y
Z
ZA
1/8 72 0.22 29
1/4 100 0.33 38
1/4 116 0.33 48
3/8 154 0.66 73
SPECIFIED BY R2xx
WHEN ORDERING
DEGREE OF ROTATION
45
90
180
270
360
SERIES
1000 & 2000 164.6 184.5 224.3 264.1 303.8
3000 & 4000 230.5 260.2 319.7 379.1 438.6
5000 & 6000 261.5 291.1 351.4 410.1 469.5
7000 & 8000 368.3 427.7 548.0 665.5 784.4
IMPERIAL SHAFTS*
V
W
TA U
38.1 8 12.69/12.71 3.15 x 1.59 x 16
50.8 14 22.22/22.23 4.75 x 2.36 x 38
50.8 10 28.55/28.58 6.35 x 3.18 x 38
63.5 19 44.42/44.45 9.53 x 2.36 x 78
V DIA
W KEYWAY
PA
-T
STANDARD
-O
-Q
PORT -P -D PORT -P -D PORT -P -D PORT -P -D
1 1
1 1
2 2
2 2
4
2
1
3
1 1
1 1
2 2
2 2
4
2
1
3
KA
35
48
57
89
A + (T° x B)
LETTER OPTION
-D
-A
-P
-B
ACTUATOR
-E
-M
TYPE
-A1 -A2
-B1
-B2 -D1 -D2 -P1 -P2
I & II I & II
I
II
I
I
II
II
I
II
R1xA & R2xA
I & II I & II
I
II
I
I
II
II
R1xH & R2xH
—
—
* BOTH IMPERIAL AND METRIC SHAFT OPTIONS AVAILABLE ON METRIC BODY
(IMPERIAL SHAFT = DESIGN 5, AND METRIC SHAFT = DESIGN 6).
NUMBERS ARE FOR METRIC UNITS AND ARE IN mm.
L
G
C2
F
Y + (T° x Z)
METRIC
SERIES
1000 & 2000
3000 & 4000
5000 & 6000
7000 & 8000
C
JA
X BSP
H
ZA MAX
3C
DIMENSIONS: SERIES 1000-8000 ROTARY ACTUATORS
SOLUTIONS FOR
SOLUTIONS FOR
CAT-03
!
pages for adders.
NOTE: Sensor must be used with a PHD
Set Point Module. See Switches and
Sensors section for information and
ordering data.
3 ROTARY POSITIONS
Use this digit for 3
Position Tandems only.
CUSHION
D - Cushions both directions
D1 - Cushion clockwise
D2 - Cushion counterclockwise
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
PROXIMITY SWITCH
MOUNTING BRACKETS
SIZE NO.
SERIES
-32
2000
-34
4000
-38
6000
-39
8000
BUILT-IN METER OUT
FLOW CONTROL VALVE
Port Control is standard on
all Air/Oil Tandem Actuators.
METRIC
Single Shaft Ext.
Air/Oil Tandem
Double Shaft Ext.
Air/Oil Tandem
PORT CONTROL©
TYPE
IMPERIAL
R13R - Single Shaft Ext.
R18R Air/Oil Tandem
R23R - Double Shaft Ext.
R28R Air/Oil Tandem
3C
ANGLE OF ROTATION
FROM POSITION I
TO POSITION II
ANGLE OF ROTATION
STANDARD ANGLES
45°, 90°, 180°, 270°,
360°, and 450°
For other available
rotations, consult PHD.
OPTIONS
- Cross Key Pinion Shaft
- Magnetic Piston for Hall Effect Switch
- Shaft Seal both sides
- Hollow Pinion Shaft (not available on type R23R)
- Port Position 1 top rack
Port Position 3 bottom rack
J - Hall Sensor (Set Point Module is ordered
separately) for units not exceeding 180°
K - Preload Keyway Pinion Shaft
L - Counterclockwise Unidirectional Clutch
N - Pilot Valve Actuator (PVA)
R - Clockwise Unidirectional Clutch
T - Port in Position 4
Y - Tandem Cap rotated 180°
Z1- Electroless Nickel Plate
C
E
G
H
I
3 R1 3 R - 2 180 - 90 - D - A - M-V
SERIES
(Oil Section is 2" Bore)
IMPERIAL
DESIGN NO.
3 - Imperial - Ports and mounting holes are imperial
8 - Metric - Ports and mounting holes are metric.
Pinon shaft and keyway are imperial.
TO ORDER SPECIFY:
Type, Design No., Series,
ORDERING DATA: AIR/OIL TANDEM ROTARY ACTUATORS
(800) 624-8511
3C-13
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
ANGLE OF ROTATION
STANDARD ANGLES
45°, 90°, 180°, 270°,
360°, and 450°
For other available
rotations, consult PHD.
BUILT-IN METER OUT
FLOW CONTROL VALVE
Port Control is standard on
all Air/Oil Tandem Actuators.
PORT CONTROL©
TYPE
R19R - Single Shaft Ext.
Air/Oil Tandem
R29R - Double Shaft Ext.
Air/Oil Tandem
NOTE: Sensor must be used with a PHD Set
Point Module. See Switches and Sensors section
3 ROTARY POSITIONS
CUSHION
D - Cushions both directions
D1 - Cushion clockwise
D2 - Cushion counterclockwise
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
SIZE NO.
SERIES
-32
2000
-34
4000
-38
6000
-39
8000
PROXIMITY SWITCH
MOUNTING BRACKETS
ANGLE OF ROTATION
FROM POSITION I
TO POSITION II
!
pages for adders.
OPTIONS
E - Magnetic Piston for Hall Effect Switch
I - Port Position 1 top rack
Port Position 3 bottom rack
Y - Tandem Cap rotated 180°
Z1- Electroless Nickel Plate
3 R1 9 R - 2 180 - 90 - D - A - M-V
SERIES
(Oil Section is 2" Bore)
METRIC
DESIGN NO.
9 - Metric - Ports, mounting holes, pinion
shaft and keyway are metric.
TO ORDER SPECIFY:
Type, Design No., Series,
3C
ORDERING DATA: AIR/OIL TANDEM ROTARY ACTUATORS
3C-14
SOLUTIONS FOR
AIR/OIL TANDEM ROTARY ACTUATORS:
SERIES 2000-8000
BENEFITS
PHD Air/Oil Tandem Actuators provide smooth consistent
rotary motion even at low speeds for applications requiring
positive control of payload.
■
Design provides simplicity and economics of air power with the
smooth control of hydraulics.
■
Oil transfer is accomplished through a one-piece tandem cap
eliminating external crossovers.
■
Four bore sizes are available in both 2 and 3 position models
with standard rotations up to 450° to fit a variety of
application requirements.
■
Built-in flow controls are standard for precise control of
rotation speed.
■
Free floating pistons with rack and pinion design eliminate
■
■
Available with a wide range of options including cushions,
angle adjustments, shock pads, and pinion shaft options for
specifying the exact actuator for your application.
■
3C
■
A
B
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
This feature is available on Series 2000, 4000, 6000,
and 8000. One end functions as a control member only,
reducing the effective output torque to match 1000, 3000,
5000, and 7000 respectively.
The illustration shows a Tandem Actuator with built-in
Port Controls®, crossover manifold and oil reservoir. The
latter serves as an accumulator to compensate for oil
volume changes due to temperature variation.
SERIES
2000
.38
[.63]
4000
1.1
[1.83]
6000
2.3
[3.62]
SPECIFICATIONS
PISTON SEALS
PISTONS
PINION SHAFTS
RACK
END CAPS
BODY
TUBES
BEARINGS
PORTS
LUBRICATION
WORKING PRESSURE
STANDARD ROTATIONS
OPTIONS
HYDRAULIC FLUID
8000
10.6
[17.61]
NOTE: The Reservoir should have 20 psi [1.3 bar]
pressure at all times to ensure the system remains purged.
R1xR & R2xR
Alloy Steel
Zinc Plated Steel
Hardcoated Aluminum
Hardcoated Aluminum on Air side, Honed Steel on Oil side
NPT [BSP]
45°, 90°, 180°, 270°, 360°, 450°
Cushions, Angle Adjustments, Magnetic Pistons,
Fluoro-Elastomer Seals (Port Controls® are standard)
Rykon 32 (Viscosity at 100°F [38°C] is 158 SSU; at 250°F [126°C] is 45.1)
3C-15
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
3C-16
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
C
3.000
4.250
5.000
8.000
D
2.000
3.000
4.000
5.000
E
1.500
2.000
2.500
3.000
OPTIONAL
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
E
F
.250
.344
.375
.469
G
.500
.688
.750
1.062
III
H
0.00
.250
.203
.437
JA
.750
1.156
1.156
1.875
KA
1.375
1.875
2.250
3.500
E
D
L
1.437
2.094
2.281
3.625
LA
2.875
4.187
4.687
6.125
LB
1.750
2.750
2.750
3.000
LA/2
LA
.080
2X BLEED PLUGS
PORT PRESSURIZED - E
FULL CCW POSITION
I
LETTER DIMENSION
M
O
NB
1/4-20 x .312 DP 1.125 x .056 DP 2.000
5/16-18 x .500 DP 2.000 x .039 DP 3.000
3/8-16 x .625 DP 2.1654 x .052 DP 3.000
3/4-10 x 1.250 DP 3.3465 x .120 DP 5.000
M THREAD
4X EACH FRONT,
BACK & BOTTOM
IV
1.000
ACTUATOR
TYPE
R1xR & R2xR
KA SQ
II
NB +.001 DIA
-.000
LETTER OPTION
-A
-D
-P
STANDARD
-T
-M
-E
-A1 -A2 -D1 -D2 -P1 -P2
PORT -P -D
PORT -P -D
4 4
III
I
II IV STANDARD I & III I & III
4 4
2
4
L
I
A + (T° x B)
B
.0174
.026
.026
.052
C/2
G
C2
F
Y + (T° x Z)
T°
PA
.875
1.875
1.875
3.500
S
.250
.500
.500
1.250
TA
1.500
2.000
2.000
2.500
S
U2
.312
.562
.375
.750
TA
3
LB
1
O
SERIES
2000
4000
6000
8000
U1
.125
.125
.125
1.000
2
2
U2
PORT PRESSURIZED - C2
FULL CW POSITION
R
.500
.625
.750
1.500
II
Q
2.000
3.000
3.500
5.000
V DIA
W KEYWAY
U1
PA
R
Q
Y
2.849
3.953
4.563
6.080
ZA
1.125
1.500
1.875
2.875
450
14.045
19.686
20.890
34.528
Z
.0087
.013
.013
.026
DEGREE OF ROTATION
360
270
180
90
45
6.998 7.781 9.347 10.913 12.479
9.156 10.326 12.666 15.006 17.346
10.360 11.530 13.870 16.210 18.550
13.468 15.808 20.488 25.168 29.848
X
1/8
1/4
1/4
3/8
SPECIFIED BY R2xR
WHEN ORDERING
CHECK VALVE
FITTING
W
V
.4998/.5003 1/8 x 1/16 x .625
.8748/.8753 3/16 x 3/32 x 1.500
1.124/1.125 1/4 x 1/8 x 1.500
1.749/1.750 3/8 x 3/16 x 3.000
4
4
2X PORT CONTROLS
IMPERIAL
SERIES
A
2000
6.215
4000
7.986
6000
9.190
8000 11.128
C
JA
2X
X NPT
H
ZA MAX
NOTE: THE RESERVOIR SHOULD HAVE 20 PSI PRESSURE AT ALL TIMES
TO ENSURE THE SYSTEM REMAINS PURGED.
RESERVOIR ASSEMBLY IS INCLUDED WITH UNIT.
DIMENSIONAL DATA IS IN AIR/OIL & RESERVOIR SECTION 10.
SERIES 2000, 4000, & 6000 UNITS USE PART NO. 13459-03-2.
SERIES 8000 UNITS USE PART NO. 13459-02-2.
3C
DIMENSIONS: AIR/OIL TANDEM ROTARY ACTUATORS
SOLUTIONS FOR
SOLUTIONS FOR
C/2
L
KA SQ
G
OPTIONAL
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
E
C2
F
III
I
Y + (T° x Z)
E
D
A + (T° x B)
CAT-03
(800) 624-8511
ACTUATOR
TYPE
R1xR & R2xR
LETTER OPTION
-A
-D
-P
-M
-E
-A1 -A2 -D1 -D2
-P1 -P2
III
I
II IV STANDARD I & III I & III
25.4
2.1
LA
O
50.8
76.2
76.2
127.0
Q
50.8
76.2
88.9
127
R
13
16
19
38
S
6
13
13
32
FULL CCW POSITION
PA
22
48
48
89
I
TA
38.1
50.8
50.8
63.5
2X BLEED PLUGS
LETTER DIMENSION
LA/2
STANDARD
-T
PORT -P -D
PORT -P -D
4 4
4 4
2
4
NB
28.58 X 1.4
50.80 X 1.0
55.00 X 1.3
85.00 X 3.0
M THREAD
4X EACH FRONT,
BACK & BOTTOM
IV
II
NB +.025 DIA
-.000
T°
II
3C
TA
3
LB
1
O
4
4
SERIES
2000
4000
6000
8000
U1
3
3
3
25
U2
8
14
10
19
R
Q
X
G1/8
G1/4
G1/4
G3/8
Y
72
100
116
154
ZA
29
38
48
73
450
356.7
500.0
530.9
877.0
Z
0.22
0.33
0.33
0.66
SPECIFIED BY R2xR
WHEN ORDERING
CHECK VALVE
FITTING
2X PORT CONTROLS
DEGREE OF ROTATION
360
270
180
90
45
177.7 197.6 237.4 277.2 317.0
232.6 262.2 321.7 381.2 440.6
263.1 292.9 352.3 411.7 471.2
342.1 401.5 520.4 639.3 758.1
METRIC SHAFTS*
V
W
12.00/11.97 4 x 2.5 x 15
22.00/21.96 6 x 3.5 x 32
28.00/27.96 8 x 5 x 40
44.00/43.96 12 x 5 x 56
FULL CW POSITION
S
2
2
U2
IMPERIAL SHAFTS*
V
W
12.69/12.71 3.15 x 1.59 x 16
22.22/22.23 4.75 x 2.36 x 38
28.55/28.58 6.35 x 3.18 x 38
44.42/44.45 9.53 x 2.36 x 78
V DIA
W KEYWAY
U1
PA
METRIC
SERIES
A
B
C D
E F G H JA KA L LA LB
M
2000
158 0.44 76 51 38.1 6 13 0 19 35 36 73 44 M6 x 1.0 x 8
4000
203 0.66 108 76 50.8 9 17 6 29 48 53 106 70 M8 x 1.0 x 13
6000
233 0.66 127 102 63.5 10 19 5 29 57 58 119 70 M10 x 1.5 x 16
8000
283 1.32 203 127 76.2 12 27 11 48 89 92 156 76 M20 x 2.5 x 32
NUMBERS FOR METRIC UNITS AND ARE IN mm.
C
JA
2X
X BSP
H
ZA MAX
NOTE: THE RESERVOIR SHOULD HAVE 1.4 bar PRESSURE AT ALL TIMES
RESERVOIR ASSEMBLY IS INCLUDED WITH UNIT.
DIMENSIONS: AIR/OIL TANDEM ROTARY ACTUATORS
3C-17
3C-18
C/2
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
D2
F
.500
.344
.375
.469
FA
.500
.375
.344
.469
GA
.750
.719
.719
1.062
E
JA
.750
1.156
1.156
1.875
KA
1.375
1.875
2.250
3.500
YA + Z (T° + K)
H
0.00
.250
.203
.437
VI
C2
L
1.437
2.094
2.281
3.625
III
PLUMBING SCHEMATIC: L0CATED IN ENGINEERING DATA SECTION
LB
1.750
2.750
2.750
3.000
M
1/4-20 x .312 DP
5/16-18 x .500 DP
3/8-16 x .625 DP
3/4-10 x 1.250 DP
E
D
R
.500
.625
.750
1.500
TA
1.500
2.000
2.000
2.500
U1
.125
.125
.125
1.000
U1
U2
.312
.562
.375
.750
S
2
2
I
3
TA
LB
1
O
J°
T°
II
K°
PORTS PRESSURIZED
D1 & D 2
W
1/8 x 1/16 x .625
3/16 x 3/32 x 1.500
1/4 x 1/8 x 1.500
3/8 x 3/16 x 3.000
U2
V
.4998/.5003
.8748/.8753
1.124/1.125
1.749/1.750
W KEYWAY
PA
FULL CCW POSITION
S
.250
.500
.500
1.250
V DIA
2X BLEED PLUGS
Q
2.000
3.000
3.500
5.000
LA
.080
LA/2
M THREAD
4X EACH FRONT,
BACK & BOTTOM
1.000
LETTER DIMENSION
NB
O
PA
1.125 x .056 DP 2.000 .875
2.000 x .039 DP 3.000 1.875
2.1654 x .052 DP 3.000 1.875
3.3465 x .120 DP 5.000 3.500
IV
II
+.001
NB -.000 DIA
Y + ( T° x Z )
STANDARD
-T
PORT -P -D
PORT -P -D
4 4
4 4
2
4
LA
2.875
4.187
4.687
6.125
YB + (T° x Z)
I
G
.750
.688
.750
1.062
D1
V
GA
FA
LETTER OPTION
-P
-D
-M
-E
-A
-D1 -D2 -P1 -P2 I & III I & III
STANDARD II IV STANDARD V & VI V & VI
E
1.500
2.000
2.500
3.000
OPTIONAL
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
D
2.000
3.000
4.000
5.000
ACTUATOR
TYPE
3R1xR & 3R2xR
C
3.000
4.250
5.000
8.000
L KA SQ
JA
G
F
YA + Z (T° + J°)
YA
5.983
6.721
7.325
9.865
R
Q
YB
2.599
3.360
3.980
5.236
Z
.0087
.013
.013
.026
ZA
1.125
1.500
1.875
2.875
SPECIFIED BY
3R2xR WHEN
ORDERING
CHECK VALVE
FITTING
FULL CW POSITION
Y
3.366
4.033
4.627
5.048
III
X
1/8
1/4
1/4
3/8
4
4
2X PORT CONTROLS
IMPERIAL
SERIES
2000
4000
6000
8000
C
4X
X NPT
H
ZA MAX
NOTE: THE RESERVOIR SHOULD HAVE 20 PSI PRESSURE AT ALL TIMES
RESERVIOR ASSEMBLY IS INCLUDED WITH UNIT.
DIMENSIONAL DATA IS IN AIR/OIL & RESERVOIR SECTION 10.
3C
DIMENSIONS: 3 POSITION AIR/OIL TANDEM
SOLUTIONS FOR
SOLUTIONS FOR
CAT-03
C/2
L KA SQ
OPTIONAL
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
D2
D1
VI
E
C2
YA + Z (T° + K)
V
GA
FA
III
I
YB + (T° x Z)
ACTUATOR
TYPE
3R1xR & 3R2xR
LETTER OPTION
-P
-D
-M
-E
-A
-D1 -D2 -P1 -P2 I & III I & III
STANDARD II IV STANDARD V & VI V & VI
NB
28.58 x 1.4 DP
50.80 x 1.0 DP
55.00 x 1.3 DP
85.00 x 3.0 DP
E
D
O
50.8
76.2
76.2
127.0
PA
22
48
48
89
Q
50.8
76.2
88.9
127.0
R
13
16
19
38
LA
2.1
LA/2
M THREAD
4X EACH FRONT,
BACK & BOTTOM
25.4
S
6
13
13
32
TA
38.1
50.8
50.8
63.5
LETTER DIMENSION
IV
II
+.025
NB -.000 DIA
Y + ( T° x Z )
-T
STANDARD
PORT -P -D
PORT -P -D
4 4
4 4
2
4
SERIES
C D
E F FA G GA H JA KA L LA LB
M
2000
76 51 38.1 13 13 19 19 0 19 35 36 73.0 44.5 M6 x 1.0 x 8
4000
108 76 50.8 9 10 17 18 6 29 48 53 106.4 69.9 M8 x 1.0 x 13
6000
127 102 63.5 10 9 19 18 5 29 57 58 119.1 69.9 M10 x 1.5 x 16
8000
203 127 76.2 12 12 27 27 11 48 89 92 155.6 76.2 M20 x 2.5 x 32
C
JA
F
G
YA + Z (T° + J°)
U1
3
3
3
25
U2
8
14
10
19
W KEYWAY
U1
(800) 624-8511
3C
FULL CCW POSITION
I
3
TA
LB
1
O
4
4
J°
T°
II
K°
III
METRIC SHAFTS*
V
W
12.00/11.97 4 x 2.5 x 15
22.00/21.96 6 x 3.5 x 32
28.00/27.96 8 x 5 x 40
44.00/43.96 12 x 5 x 56
S
2
2
U2
PORTS PRESSURIZED
D1 & D2
IMPERIAL SHAFTS*
V
W
12.69/12.71 3.15 x 1.59 x 16
22.22/22.23 4.75 x 2.36 x 38
28.55/28.58 6.35 x 3.18 x 38
44.42/44.45 9.53 x 2.36 x 78
V DIA
2X BLEED PLUGS
PA
Y
85
102
118
128
YA
152
171
186
251
YB
66
85
101
133
Z
0.22
0.33
0.33
0.66
SPECIFIED BY
3R2xR WHEN
ORDERING
FULL CW POSITION
X
G1/8
G1/4
G1/4
G3/8
R
Q
CHECK VALVE
FITTING
2X PORT CONTROLS
METRIC
4X
X BSP
H
ZA MAX
NOTE: THE RESERVOIR SHOULD HAVE 1.4 BAR PRESSURE AT ALL TIMES
RESERVIOR ASSEMBLY IS INCLUDED WITH UNIT.
ZA
29
38
48
73
DIMENSIONS: 3 POSITION AIR/OIL TANDEM
3C-19
www.phdinc.com/multir
ANGLE OF ROTATION
FROM POSITION I
TO POSITION II
ANGLE OF ROTATION
FROM POSITION I
TO POSITION IV. USED
ON 5 POSITION ONLY.
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
NOTES:
1) Angle Adjustments are standard on all Multi-Position
Rotary Actuators.
and ordering data.
!
pages for adders.
TOTAL ANGLE
OF ROTATION
STANDARD ANGLES
SIZE NO.
SERIES
-32
2000
-34
4000
-38
6000
-39
8000
PROXIMITY SWITCH
MOUNTING BRACKETS
ANGLE OF ROTATION
FROM POSITION I
TO POSITION III. USED
ON 4 & 5 POSITION ONLY.
OPTIONS
B - Shock Pads on extreme positions (not
available on hydraulic units)
C - Cross Key Pinion Shaft
D - Cushions on extreme positions
E - Magnetic Piston (All) or Hall Effect Switch
G - Shaft Seal both sides
H - Hollow Pinion Shaft (not available on type
R21x)
I - Port Position 1 on top rack
J - Hall Sensor for rotations not exceeding 180°
(Set Point Module is ordered separately)
K - Preload Keyway Pinion Shaft
M - Magnetic Piston (All) for Reed Switch
P - Port Controls on all caps
5 - R1 1 A - 4 180 - 45 - 90 - 135 - P-D
DESIGN NO.
1 - Imperial - Port and mounting holes are imperial.
5 - Metric - Port and mounting holes are metric.
Pinion shafts and keyway are imperial.
SERIES
NOTE: 2000 Series available in
3 Position only.
IMPERIAL
TYPE
IMPERIAL
METRIC
150 psi Air Max.
10 bar Air Max.
150 psi Air Max.
10 bar Air Max.
1500 psi Hyd. Max.
100 bar Hyd. Max.
1500 psi Hyd. Max.
100 bar Hyd. Max.
NO. OF
ROTARY POSITIONS
3 - 3 Position
4 - 4 Position
5 - 5 Position
TO ORDER SPECIFY:
No. of Rotary Positions, Type, Design No., Series,
Total Angle of Rotation, Various Angle Positions,
and Options.
3C
ORDERING DATA: MULTI-POSITION ROTARY ACTUATORS
3C-20
SOLUTIONS FOR
SOLUTIONS FOR
CAT-03
SERIES
NOTE: 2000 Series available in
3 Position only.
ANGLE OF ROTATION
FROM POSITION I
TO POSITION II
ANGLE OF ROTATION
FROM POSITION I
TO POSITION IV. USED
ON 5 POSITION ONLY.
TYPE
10 bar Air Max.
10 bar Air Max.
100 bar Hyd. Max.
100 bar Hyd. Max.
TOTAL ANGLE
OF ROTATION
STANDARD ANGLES
SIZE NO.
SERIES
-32
2000
-34
4000
-38
6000
-39
8000
PROXIMITY SWITCH
MOUNTING BRACKETS
ANGLE OF ROTATION
FROM POSITION I
TO POSITION III. USED
ON 4 & 5 POSITION ONLY.
3C
!
pages for adders.
OPTIONS
B - Shock Pads on extreme positions (not
available on hydraulic units)
D - Cushions on extreme positions
E - Magnetic Piston (All) or Hall Effect Switch
G - Shaft Seal both sides
M - Magnetic Piston (All) for Reed Switch
P - Port Controls on all caps
5 - R1 6 A - 4 180 - 45 - 90 - 135 - P-D
DESIGN NO.
6 - Metric - Ports, mounting holes,
pinion shafts and keyway are metric.
NOTES:
1) Angle Adjustments are standard on all Multi-Position
Rotary Actuators.
and ordering data.
NO. OF
ROTARY POSITIONS
3 - 3 Position
4 - 4 Position
5 - 5 Position
TO ORDER SPECIFY:
No. of Rotary Positions, Type, Design No., Series,
Total Angle of Rotation, Various Angle Positions,
and Options.
ORDERING DATA: MULTI-POSITION ROTARY ACTUATORS
METRIC
(800) 624-8511
3C-21
MULTI-POSITION ROTARY ACTUATORS:
SERIES 2000-8000
BENEFITS
■
PHD Multi-Position Rotary Actuators are offered in
3, 4, or 5 output shaft positions ideal for feeding and
positioning applications.
■
Multiple positioning design eliminates expensive and
cumbersome fixturing and pinning.
■
PHD Multi-Position Actuators are pneumatically or
hydraulically powered providing output torques up to
15,900 in-lb [1797 Nm].
3C
■
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
Four bore sizes are available with extreme position rotation up
to 450° to fit a variety of requirements.
■
Free floating pistons with rack and pinion design eliminate
■
■
Available with a wide range of options including built-in flow
controls, cushions, shock pads, and pinion shaft options
specifying the exact actuator for your application.
■
PHD Rotary Actuators and Multi-Motion Actuators
can be provided to yield three, four, or five output shaft
positions. The intermediate angle increments are fixed as
specified and only the extreme positions can be adjusted
in the field.
Units are available for air or hydraulic service. The
schematic example shows a five position rotary actuator.
Pressurizing Port E provides full counter clockwise
rotation (Position I). Pressurizing Ports D1 and D2 traps
the rack between the rod ends of the two outer pistons X
and Y to rotate output shaft to Position II. Pressurizing
Ports C1 and C2 moves floating pistons in the inside upper
cylinders against stop tubes to trap the rack in Position III.
Similarly, Positions IV and V can be obtained by
pressurizing Ports B1, B2 and A respectively.
Output positions can be selected in any sequence
allowing the actuator to stop at, or pass, any of the
intermediate positions (II, III, or IV).
D1
SERIES
2000
.38
[.63]
4000
1.1
[1.83]
6000
2.3
[3.62]
8000
10.6
[17.61]
BEARINGS
PORTS
LUBRICATION
WORKING PRESSURE
STANDARD ROTATIONS
OPTIONS
C1
E
A
B1
Y
D2
SPECIFICATIONS
PISTON SEALS
PISTONS
TUBE SEALS
PINION SHAFTS
RACKS
END CAPS
BODY
TUBES
C2
X
B2
TYPE
R1xA & R2xA
R1xH & R2xH
Square Cut
Alloy Steel
Zinc Plated Steel
Hardcoated Aluminum
Hardcoated Aluminum
Hardcoated Aluminum on Series 2000 & 4000
—
Honed Steel on Series 6000 & 8000
NPT [BSP]
—
1500 psi [100 bar] Hyd. Max.
45°, 90°, 180°, 270°, 360°, 450°
Port Controls®, Cushions, Magnetic Pistons,
Fluoro-Elastomer Seals (Angle Adjustment is standard)
3C-22
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
SOLUTIONS FOR
CAT-03
C
3.000
4.250
5.000
8.000
D
2.000
3.000
4.000
5.000
E
E
1.500
2.000
2.500
3.000
III
I
F
.250
.344
.375
.469
G
.500
.688
.750
1.062
H
0.00
.250
.203
.437
E
D
JA
.750
1.156
1.156
1.875
A + (T° x B)
KA
1.375
1.875
2.250
3.500
L
1.437
2.094
2.281
3.625
A
C1
M
1/4-20 x .312 DP
5/16-18 x .500 DP
3/8-16 x .625 DP
3/4-10 x 1.250 DP
M THREAD
4X EACH FRONT,
BACK & BOTTOM
IV
II
+.001
NB -.000 DIA
CUSHIONS: SERIES 2000 ACTUATORS:
ADD 1/2" TO RESPECTIVE “A” AND “Y” DIMENSION FOR EACH CUSHION
STOP TUBES: LOCATED IN TUBES I & II
FULL CCW POSITION
I
Q
2.000
3.000
3.500
5.000
V DIA
I°
T°
II
R°
PA
III
TA
1.500
2.000
2.000
2.500
S
2
2
U
U
.312
.562
.375
.750
O
(800) 624-8511
3C
R
Q
X
1/8
1/4
1/4
3/8
Y
2.849
3.953
4.563
6.080
Z
.0087
.013
.013
.026
SPECIFIED BY 3R21x
WHEN ORDERING
W
1/8 x 1/16 x .625
3/16 x 3/32 x 1.500
1/4 x 1/8 x 1.500
3/8 x 3/16 x 3.000
4
4
DEGREE OF ROTATION
SERIES
45
90
180
270
360
2000
6.481 7.264 8.830 10.396 11.962
4000
9.076 10.246 12.586 14.926 17.266
6000 10.296 11.466 13.806 16.146 18.486
8000 14.500 16.840 21.520 26.200 30.880
V
.4998/.5003
.8748/.8753
1.124/1.125
1.749/1.750
3
TA
1
FULL CW POSITION
S
.250
.500
.500
1.250
W KEYWAY
R
.500
.625
.750
1.500
PORTS PRESSURIZED
C1 & C2
LETTER DIMENSION
NB
O
PA
1.125 x .056 DP 2.000 .875
2.000 x .039 DP 3.000 1.875
2.1654 x .052 DP 3.000 1.875
3.3465 x .120 DP 5.000 3.500
ZA MAX
LETTER OPTION
STANDARD
-T
-E PORT -P -D PORT -P -D
-A
-D
-B
-P -M
2
1&3 1
4
1&3 1
STANDARD I & II I & II ALL ALL ALL
2
1&3 1
4
1&3 1
STANDARD N/A I & II ALL ALL ALL
B
.0174
.026
.026
.052
L KA SQ
A
5.698
7.906
9.126
12.160
C/2
C2
F
G
Y + (T° x Z)
450
13.528
19.606
20.826
35.560
ZA
1.125
1.500
1.875
2.875
IMPERIAL
ACTUATOR
TYPE
3R11A & 3R21A
3R11H & 3R21H
SERIES
2000
4000
6000
8000
C
JA
4X
X NPT
H
ZA MAX
DIMENSIONS: 3 POSITION ROTARY ACTUATORS
3C-23
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
E
III
B
C
D
E
F G H
0.44 76 51 38.1 6 13 0
0.66 108 76 50.8 9 17 6
0.66 127 102 63.5 10 19 5
1.32 203 127 76.2 12 27 11
L KA SQ
I
JA
19
29
29
48
KA
35
48
57
89
E
D
FULL CCW POSITION
LETTER OPTION
STANDARD
-T
-A
-B
-P -M
-D
2
1&3 1
4
1&3 1
STANDARD I & II I & II ALL ALL ALL
2
1&3 1
4
1&3 1
STANDARD N/A I & II ALL ALL ALL
I
V DIA
I°
T°
II
R°
W KEYWAY
PA
S
2
2
U
3
TA
1
III
O
4
4
R
Q
DEGREE OF ROTATION
45
90
180
270
360
164.6 184.5 224.2 264.1 303.8
230.5 260.2 319.8 379.1 438.6
261.5 291.1 410.8 350.7 469.5
368.3 427.7 539.6 546.6 784.4
450
343.6
498.0
529.0
903.2
X
Y
Z
ZA
G1/8 72 0.22 29
G1/4 100 0.33 38
G1/4 116 0.33 48
G3/8 154 0.66 73
SPECIFIED BY 3R2xx
WHEN ORDERING
METRIC SHAFTS*
W
V
12.00/11.97 4 x 2.5 x 15
22.00/21.96 6 x 3.5 x 32
28.00/27.96 8 x 5 x 40
44.00/43.96 12 x 5 x 56
FULL CW POSITION
SERIES
2000
4000
6000
8000
IMPERIAL SHAFTS*
W
V
12.69/12.71 3.15 x 1.59 x 16
22.22/22.23 4.75 x 2.36 x 38
28.55/28.58 6.35 x 3.18 x 38
44.42/44.45 9.53 x 2.36 x 78
PORTS PRESSURIZED
C1 & C2
R S TA U
13 6 38.1 8
16 13 50.8 14
19 13 50.8 10
38 32 63.5 19
LETTER DIMENSION
NB
O
PA
Q
28.58 x 1.4 DP 50.8 22 50.8
50.80 x 1.0 DP 76.2 48 76.2
55.00 x 1.3 DP 76.2 48 88.9
85.00 x 3.0 DP 127.0 89 127.0
CUSHIONS: SERIES 2000 ACTUATORS:
ADD 13.0 mm TO RESPECTIVE “A” AND “Y” DIMENSION FOR EACH CUSHION
ACTUATOR
TYPE
3R1xA & 3R2xA
3R1xH & 3R2xH
A
C1
ZA MAX
M THREAD
4X EACH FRONT,
BACK & BOTTOM
IV
II
+.025
NB -.000 DIA
L
M
36 M6 x 1.0 x 8
53 M8 x 1.0 x 13
58 M10 x 1.5 x 16
92 M20 x 2.5 x 32
A + (T° x B)
A
145
201
292
302
C/2
G
C2
F
Y + (T° x Z)
METRIC
SERIES
2000
4000
6000
8000
C
JA
4X
X BSP
H
ZA MAX
3C
3C-24
SOLUTIONS FOR
SOLUTIONS FOR
C/2
L
KA SQ
D2
D1
F
G
E
C2
YA + Z (T° + K°)
VI
V
GA
FA
III
I
YB + (T° x Z)
E
D
IV
II
+.001
NB -.000 DIA
Y + (T° x Z)
F
H
M THREAD
4X EACH FRONT,
BACK & BOTTOM
A
C1
G
ZA MAX
CAT-03
ACTUATOR
TYPE
4R11A & 4R21A
4R11H & 4R21H
STANDARD
-T
-D
-E PORT -P
-D
PORT -P
-A
-D
-B
-P -M
2
1&3 1&3
4
1&3 1&3
STANDARD II & IV II & IV ALL ALL ALL
2
1&3 1&3
4
1&3 1&3
STANDARD N/A II & IV ALL ALL ALL
LETTER OPTION
S
2
2
U
3
TA
1
O
4
4
R
Q
SPECIFIED BY 4R21x
WHEN ORDERING
PORTS PRESSURIZED – E
FULL CCW POSITION
I
PORTS PRESSURIZED
D1 & D2
II
J°
3C
I°
K°
T°
R°
III
IV
PORTS PRESSURIZED – A
FULL CW POSITION
PORTS PRESSURIZED
C1 & C 2
Z
ZA
YB
YA
Y
X
W
V
U
TA
S
R
Q
PA
1.875 3.000 .625 .500 2.000 .562 .8748/.8753 3/16 x 3/32 x 1.500 1/4 3.953 6.721 3.360 .013 1.500
1.875 3.500 .750 .500 2.000 .375 1.124/1.125 1/4 x 1/8 x 1.500 1/4 4.563 7.325 3.980 .013 1.875
3.500 5.000 1.500 1.250 2.500 .750 1.749/1.750 3/8 x 3/16 x 3.000 3/8 6.080 9.865 5.236 .026 2.875
V DIA
W KEYWAY
PA
IMPERIAL
LETTER DIMENSION
M
FA
L
KA
JA
H
GA
G
F
E
D
O
SERIES C
NB
4000 4.250 3.000 2.000 .344 .375 .688 .719 .250 1.156 1.875 2.094 5/16-18 x .500 DP 2.000 x .039 3.000
6000 5.000 4.000 2.500 .375 .344 .750 .719 .203 1.156 2.250 2.281 3/8-16 x .625 DP 2.1654 x .052 3.000
8000 8.000 5.000 3.000 .469 .469 1.062 1.062 .437 1.875 3.500 3.625 3/4-10 x 1.250 DP 3.3465 x .120 5.000
C
JA
6X X NPT
H
YA + Z (T° + J°)
(800) 624-8511
3C-25
C/2
L
KA SQ
D2
D1
F
G
E
C2
YA + Z (T° + K°)
VI
V
GA
FA
III
I
YB + (T° x Z)
E
D
IV
II
+.025
NB -.000 DIA
Y + (T° x Z)
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
H
PA
Q
48 76.2
48 88.9
89 127.0
R
16
19
38
V DIA
W KEYWAY
PA
S
2
2
U
3
TA
1
O
4
4
R
Q
PORTS PRESSURIZED – E
FULL CCW POSITION
I
PORTS PRESSURIZED
D1 & D2
II
J°
I°
K°
T°
R°
III
IV
PORTS PRESSURIZED – A
FULL CW POSITION
PORTS PRESSURIZED
C1 & C2
YB
Z ZA
85 0.33 38
101 0.33 48
133 0.66 73
SPECIFIED BY 4R2xx
WHEN ORDERING
IMPERIAL SHAFTS*
METRIC SHAFTS*
S TA U
V
X
Y YA
W
V
W
13 50.8 14 22.22/22.23 4.75 x 2.36 x 38 22.00/21.96 6 x 3.5 x 32 G1/4 102 171
13 50.8 10 28.55/28.58 6.35 x 3.18 x 38 28.00/27.96 8 x 5 x 40 G1/4 118 186
32 63.5 19 44.42/44.45 9.53 x 2.36 x 78 44.00/43.96 12 x 5 x 56 G3/8 126 251
LETTER DIMENSION
M THREAD
4X EACH FRONT,
BACK & BOTTOM
A
STANDARD
-T
ACTUATOR
-D
-E PORT -P
-D
PORT -P
-A
-B
-P -M
-D
TYPE
2
1&3 1&3
4
1&3 1&3
4R1xA & 4R2xA STANDARD II & IV II & IV ALL ALL ALL
2
1&3 1&3
4
1&3 1&3
4R15xH & 4R2xH STANDARD N/A II & IV ALL ALL ALL
LETTER OPTION
F
C1
G
ZA MAX
METRIC
SERIES C
D
E
F FA G GA H JA KA L
M
NB
O
4000 108 76 50.8 9 10 17 18 6 29 48 53 M8 x 1.25 x 13 50.80 x 1.0 DP 76.2
6000 127 102 63.5 10 9 19 18 5 29 57 58 M10 x 1.5 x 16 55.00 x 1.3 DP 76.2
8000 203 127 76.2 12 12 27 27 11 48 89 92 M20 x 2.5 x 32 85.00 x 3.0 DP 127.0
C
JA
6X X BSP
H
YA + Z (T° + J°)
3C
3C-26
SOLUTIONS FOR
SOLUTIONS FOR
C/2 L
KA SQ
D2
G
D1
F
E
C2
I
YB + (T° x Z)
III
YA + Z (T° + K°)
VI
V
GA
FA
YA + Z (T° + J°)
E
D
A
C1
VIII
VII
YA + Z (T° x P°)
M THREAD
4X EACH FRONT,
BACK & BOTTOM
IV
II
YA + Z (T° + N°)
YB + (T° x Z)
FA
+.001
DIA
NB -.000
GA
F
B1
G
B2
ZA MAX
H
V DIA
W KEYWAY
PA
S
2
2
U
3
TA
1
O
CAT-03
ACTUATOR
TYPE
5R11A & 5R21A
5R11H & 5R21H
LETTER OPTION
STANDARD
-T
-A
-B
-P -M
-D
2
1&3 1
4
1&3 1
STANDARD VII & V VII & V ALL ALL ALL
2
1&3 1
4
1&3 1
STANDARD N/A VII & V ALL ALL ALL
(800) 624-8511
I
3C
FULL CCW POSITION
PORTS PRESSURIZED
D1 & D 2
II
J°
I°
P°
T°
K°
III
R°
PORTS PRESSURIZED
C1 & C 2
N°
R
Q
SPECIFIED BY
5R21x WHEN
ORDERING
IV
PRESSURIZED - A
V PORT
FULL CW POSITION
PORTS PRESSURIZED
B1 & B 2
X
ZA
YA
YB
Z
1/4 6.721 3.360 .013 1.500
1/4 7.325 3.980 .013 1.875
3/8 9.865 5.236 .026 2.875
4
4
IMPERIAL
LETTER DIMENSION
NB
JA
KA
L
Q
R
S
U
W
O
SERIES
C
D
E
F
G
GA
M
TA
V
FA
PA
H
4000 4.250 3.000 2.000 .344 .375 .688 .719 .250 1.156 1.875 2.094 5/16-18 x .500 DP 2.000 x .039 DP 3.000 1.875 3.000 .625 .500 2.000 .562 .8748/.8753 3/16 x 3/32 x 1.500
6000 5.000 4.000 2.500 .375 .344 .750 .719 .203 1.156 2.250 2.281 3/8-16 x .625 DP 2.1654 x .052 DP 3.000 1.875 3.500 .750 .500 2.000 .375 1.124/1.125 1/4 x 1/8 x 1.500
8000 8.000 5.000 3.000 .469 .469 1.062 1.062 .437 1.875 3.500 3.625 3/4-10 x 1.250 DP 3.3465 x .120 DP 5.000 3.500 5.000 1.500 1.250 2.500 .750 1.749/1.750 3/8 x 3/16 x 3.000
C
JA
8X
X NPT
H
ZA MAX
3C-27
C/2 L
KA SQ
D2
G
D1
F
E
C2
YA + Z (T° + K°)
VI
V
GA
FA
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
LETTER OPTION
STANDARD
-T
-A
-P -M
-B
-D
2
1&3 1
4
1&3 1
STANDARD VII & V VII & V ALL ALL ALL
2
1&3 1
4
1&3 1
STANDARD N/A VII & V ALL ALL ALL
ACTUATOR
TYPE
5R1xA & 5R2xA
5R1xH & 5R2xH
A
C1
VIII
VII
F
B1
G
LETTER DIMENSION
YA + Z (T° x P°)
M THREAD
4X EACH FRONT,
BACK & BOTTOM
IV
II
YA + Z (T° + N°)
YB + (T° x Z)
FA
+.025
NB -.000 DIA
GA
B2
ZA MAX
H
W KEYWAY
PA
S
2
2
U
3
TA
1
O
4
4
I
PORTS PRESSURIZED
D1 & D2
II
J°
I°
P°
T°
K°
III
R°
PORTS PRESSURIZED
C1 & C2
N°
IV
IMPERIAL SHAFTS*
METRIC SHAFTS*
X
V
W
V
W
22.22/22.23 4.75 x 2.36 x 38 22.00/21.96 6 x 3.5 x 32 G1/4
28.55/28.58 6.35 x 3.18 x 38 28.00/27.96 8 x 5 x 40 G1/4
44.42/44.45 9.53 x 2.36 x 78 44.00/43.96 12 x 5 x 56 G3/8
V DIA
FULL CCW POSITION
M
KA L
O
PA
Q
R S TA U
NB
48 53 M8 x 1.25 x 13 50.80 x 1.0 DP 76.2 48 76.2 16 13 50.8 14
57 58 M10 x 1.5 x 16 55.00 x 1.3 DP 76.2 48 88.9 19 13 50.8 10
89 92 M20 x 2.5 x 32 85.00 x 3.0 DP 127.0 89 127.0 38 32 63.5 19
E
D
JA
29
29
48
I
YB + (T° x Z)
III
YA + Z (T° + J°)
SPECIFIED BY
5R2xx WHEN
ORDERING
PRESSURIZED - A
V PORT
FULL CW POSITION
PORTS PRESSURIZED
B1 & B2
ZA
YA YB
Z
171 85 0.33 38
186 101 0.33 48
251 133 0.66 73
R
Q
METRIC
SERIES C
E
F FA G GA H
D
4000 108 76 50.8 9 10 17 18 6
6000 127 102 63.5 10 9 19 18 5
8000 203 127 76.2 12 12 27 27 11
C
JA
8X
X BSP
H
ZA MAX
3C
3C-28
SOLUTIONS FOR
ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES 1000-8000 ROTARY ACTUATORS
RATINGS
CONTROLS
All pneumatic rotary actuators have a maximum pressure rating of
150 psi [10 bar] air. Most hydraulic rotary actuators have a maximum
pressure rating of 1500 psi [100 bar]. Except as noted in chart below.*
Rotary Actuator units are operated by directional valves in the same
manner as air and hydraulic cylinders.
Control of piston speeds is extremely important as inertia force is a
function of rotational speed and distance from load to output shaft center.
*PLAIN
— —
1000 [69]
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
OPTION psi [bar]
-P
-D
— —
— —
750 [52]
750 [52]
— —
— —
750 [52]
750 [52]
— —
— —
750 [52]
750 [52]
— —
— —
750 [52]
750 [52]
-E OR -M
— —
— —
— —
— —
1100 [76]
1100 [76]
500 [35]
500 [35]
ANGLE OF ROTATION
Series 1000-8000 Rotary Actuators are furnished in 6 stock angles:
45°, 90°, 180°, 270°, 360°, and 450°. Other angles are available as
specified.
Series 018x Miniature Rotary Actuators are all furnished with 180°
rotation, but can be adjusted anywhere from 180° to 0°.
TOTAL ROTATIONAL
TOLERANCES & BACKLASH
Minimum factor of safety at maximum rated hydraulic pressure for
output shaft is 2:1, and for hydraulic chambers is 3:1. Consult PHD for
proof pressure data.
SERIES
1000 & 2000
3000 & 4000
5000 & 6000
7000 & 8000
018x75x
BREAKAWAY
All RxxA units will breakway at 20 psi [1.4 bar]. RxxH units will
breakway at 40 psi [2.8 bar]. All tandem RxxR units will breakaway at 40
psi [2.8 bar]. 018x air units will breakaway at 20 psi [1.4 bar], 018x
tandem units will breakaway at 30 psi [2.1 bar].
TEMPERATURE LIMITS AND FLUIDS
Rotary Actuator units are equipped with Buna-N piston seals
suitable for use in temperatures ranging from -20° to +180°F
[-28° to 82°C] and may be used with air, water, petroleum-based
hydraulic fluid, or fuel oil.
Seals for other fluids or temperature requirements are available, but
must be specified. All Rotary Actuators have teflon back-up rings for
universal use (except Miniature Rotary Actuators Series 018x).
NOTE: For applications where water-based fluids are used, the units
must be modified. Consult PHD for specifications.
018x50x
*Double rack actuators are available with 0° backlash at ends of
rotation, if -A option is used.
Total rotational tolerance may be on both or either sides of midrotation minimum.
MULTI-POSITION MID-POSITION
TOLERANCES & BACKLASH
SERIES
2000
4000 & 6000
8000
018x752 (3 pos.)
LUBRICATION
Gear racks and pinion are lubricated at the factory and may never
need lubrication. However, if lubrication should be needed due to adverse
conditions, use high grade bearing grease.
NOTE: Port for grease nipple provided in top of actuator body.
Lubricate only while ports are pressurized except on 018x75 and 018x50,
which have no lube ports.
Approximately 1/2 in3 [8 cm3] of grease is sufficient for any series
actuator, each 250,000 cycles of 360° duration.
BACKLASH
-0°, +10°
*±30 minutes
-0°, +10°
*±15 minutes
-0°, +10°
*±15 minutes
-0°, +10°
*±7.5 minutes
-0°, +10°
±1.25 degrees during
rotation, ±0° at end
-0°, +10°
±2 degrees during
rotation, ±0° at end
TOLERANCE**
±1°
±1/2°
±1/4°
Adjustable
BACKLASH
± 1-1/2°
± 1-1/4°
± 1°
Adjustable to 0°
**Rotational position from one intermediate position to another
(measured at centers of backlash).
NOTE: 3 position and 5 position have 0° backlash at ends of rotation.
4 position will have up to stated figure at ends of rotation.
3C-29
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
3C
HYD
SERIES
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
3C
THEORETICAL TORQUE OUTPUT in-lb [Nm]
40
MODEL [2.7]
15
1000
[1.7]
31
2000
[3.5]
44
3000
[4.9]
88
4000
[10.0]
94
5000
[10.6]
189
6000
[21.4]
424
7000
[47.9]
848
8000
[95.5]
4.4
018x751
[.49]
50
60
70
80
[3.4] [4.1] [4.8] [5.5]
19
23
27
31
[2.1] [2.6] [3.0] [3.5]
39
47
54
62
[4.4] [5.3] [6.1] [7.1]
55
66
77
88
[6.2] [7.4] [8.7] [10.0]
111 133 155 177
[12.6] [15.0] [17.5] [20.0]
118 141 165 189
[13.3] [15.9] [18.7] [21.4]
236 282 330 378
[26.7] [31.9] [37.3] [42.7]
530 635 740 848
[59.9] [71.8] [83.7] [95.9]
1060 1270 1480 1696
[119.9] [143.6] [167.4] [191.8]
5.5
6.6
7.7
8.8
[.62] [.74] [.87] [.99]
INPUT PRESSURE psi [bar]
90
100
120
150
[6.2] [6.9] [8.3] [10.3]
35
39
47
58
[4.0] [4.4] [5.3] [6.6]
70
78
94
117
[8.0] [8.8] [16.6] [13.2]
100
111
133
166
[11.3] [12.6] [15.0] [18.8]
200
222
266
333
[22.6] [25.1] [30.1] [37.7]
212
236
283
354
[23.9] [26.7] [32.0] [4.0]
424
472
564
708
[47.9] [53.4] [63.8] [80.1]
950
1060 1270 1590
[107.4] [179.9] [143.4] [179.8]
1900 2120 2540 3180
[214.8] [239.7] [287.2] [359.6]
9.9
11.0
13.2
16.5
[1.12] [1.24] [1.49] [1.87]
0180752
8.8 11.0 13.2 15.4 17.6
19.8
22.0
26.4
33.0
0185752
[.99] [1.24] [1.49] [1.74] [1.99] [2.24] [2.48] [2.98] [3.73]
0186752
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0183752
4.4
5.5
6.6
7.7
8.8
0188752
[.49] [.62] [.74] [.87] [.99]
0189752
9.9
11.0
13.2
16.5
[1.12] [1.24] [1.49] [1.87]
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5.9
[.66]
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
3.3
[.37]
3.9
[.44]
7.7
[.87]
—
—
—
—
2.6
[.29]
6.6
[.74]
—
—
9.9
11.0
13.2
16.5
[1.12] [1.24] [1.49] [1.87]
018x502
5.5
[.62]
—
—
8.8
[.99]
018x75T
4.4
[.49]
250
500
1000 1500
[17.2] [34.4] [68.9] [103.4]
98
196
392
588
[11.1] [22.2] [44.3] [66.5]
196
392
784
—
[22.2] [44.3] [88.6] [—]
277
555
1110 1665
[31.3] [62.7] [125.5] [188.2]
555
1110 2200 3330
[62.7] [125.5] [248.8] [376.5]
590
1180 2360 3540
[66.7] [133.4] [266.9] [400.3]
1180 2360 4720 7080
[133.4] [266.9] [533.7] [800.6]
2650 5300 10600 15900
[299.7] [599.5] [1198.6][1297.4]
5300 10600 21200 31800
[599.3] [1198.6][2397.3][3595.9]
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
4.6
[.52]
5.2
[.59]
6.5
[.74]
7.8
[.88]
9.8
[1.11]
Use the single rack torques for all Air/Oil Tandem and Multi-Position Rotary Actuators.
Torques shown are theoretical. Allow 10% for friction loss. Allow 20% for friction loss
on all Air/Oil Tandem Rotary Actuators.
3C-30
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
PHYSICAL DATA
3C
GEAR
DISPLACEMENT
AXIAL BEARING
RADIAL BEARING
DISTANCE BETWEEN
PISTON
SERIES RACKS in3 [cm3]/DEG. ROT. LOAD CAPACITY lb [N]* LOAD CAPACITY lb [N]* SHAFT BEARINGS in [mm] DIAMETER in [mm]
1000
1
.007
[.115]
50 [222]
100 [444]
1.375 [34.9]
1
[25.4]
2000
2
.014
[.229]
3000
1
.019
[.312]
125 [556]
250 [1112]
2.188 [55.6]
1-3/8 [35]
4000
2
.038
[.623]
5000
1
.041
[.672]
200 [890]
400 [1779]
2.235 [56.8]
2
[50]
6000
2
.082
[13.44]
7000
1
.185
[3.032]
500 [2224]
1000 [4448]
3.750 [95.3]
3
[76]
8000
2
.370
[6.064]
018x751
1
.002
[0.032]
15
[67]
25
[111]
1.060 [26.9]
3/4
[19]
018x752
2
.004
[0.064]
018x75T
2
.002
[0.032]
15
[67]
25
[111]
1.060 [26.9]
3/4
[19]
018x502
2
.0012 [0.020]
5
[22]
15
[22]
.916 [23.3]
1/2
[13]
* Always support rotating member on external bearings whenever possible.
WEIGHT TABLES lb [kg] SINGLE SHAFT EXTENSION ACTUATORS
SERIES
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000 Air
7000 Hyd.
8000 Air
8000 Hyd.
45°
2.1 [.95]
3.1 [1.40]
7.2 [3.26]
9.6 [4.35]
11.5 [5.22]
15.8 [7.7]
37.9 [17.19]
39.1 [17.75]
49.6 [22.52]
52.1 [23.65]
90°
2.3 [1.04]
3.3 [1.50]
7.5 [3.40]
10.2 [4.62]
11.9 [5.42]
16.8 [7.63]
39.1 [12.25]
41.0 [18.60]
52.1 [23.65]
55.9 [25.35]
180°
2.6 [1.18]
3.9 [1.78]
8.3 [3.76]
11.4 [5.17]
12.8 [5.80]
18.3 [8.3]
41.7 [18.91]
44.8 [20.32]
57.4 [26.03]
63.4 [28.75]
270°
2.9 [1.31]
4.5 [2.09]
9.0 [4.08]
12.6 [5.71]
13.5 [6.13]
19.8 [8.99]
44.2 [20.05]
48.5 [22.00]
62.6 [28.41]
70.9 [32.16]
360°
3.3 [1.49]
5.1 [2.32]
9.8 [4.45]
13.8 [6.26]
14.3 [6.49]
21.3 [9.67]
46.8 [21.20]
52.3 [23.71]
67.9 [30.80]
78.4 [35.56]
450°
3.6 [1.64]
5.7 [2.58]
10.5 [4.76]
15.0 [6.80]
15.1 [6.86]
22.8 [10.35]
49.4 [22.43]
56.0 [25.41]
73.1 [33.18]
85.9 [38.96]
PER 90° ADD FOR SHAFT EXT.
.3 [.14]
.1
[.04]
.6 [.28]
.1
[.04]
.8 [.36]
.4
[.18]
1.2 [.54]
.4
[.18]
.8 [.37]
.5
[.27]
1.5 [.68]
.5
[.27]
2.6 [1.19]
2.4 [1.08]
3.8 [1.72]
2.4 [1.08]
5.3 [2.40]
2.4 [1.08]
7.5 [3.40]
2.4 [1.08]
MINIATURE ROTARY ACTUATORS WEIGHTS lb [kg]
018x751
2.1
[.95]
018x752
2.6
[1.18]
SERIES
018x75T
2.6 [1.18]
0183752, 0188752, & 0189752
3.1 [1.41]
018x502
.8
[.36]
AIR/OIL TANDEM MAXIMUM SPEEDS (NO LOAD CONDITION)
SERIES
2000
4000
OPERATING
OIL
MAX. SPEED
PRESSURE psi [bar] TEMPERATURE* (DEGREES/SEC)
50
[3.4]
270
60
[4.1]
95°F
294
70
[4.8]
[35°C]
336
80
[5.5]
366
50
[3.4]
258
60
[4.1]
95°F
288
70
[4.8]
[35°C]
324
80
[5.5]
348
OPERATING
OIL
SECONDS/
MODEL PRESSURE psi [bar] TEMPERATURE* 180° ROTATION
50
[3.4]
.31
60
[4.1]
95°F
.27
018x75T
70
[4.8]
[35°C]
.25
80
[5.5]
.22
SERIES
6000
8000
OPERATING
OIL
MAX. SPEED
PRESSURE psi [bar] TEMPERATURE* (DEGREES/SEC)
50
[3.4]
156
60
[4.1]
105°F
180
70
[4.8]
[40.5°C]
210
80
[5.5]
216
50
[3.4]
132
60
[4.1]
135°F
144
70
[4.8]
[57.2°C]
150
80
[5.5]
156
*Ambient Temperature 87°F [30°C] Standard Oil No. 15
Reservoir Pressure = 20 psi [1.3 bar]
Speed decreases with increase in reservoir pressure.
3C-31
(800) 624-8511
SOLUTIONS FOR
CAT-03
PLUMBING SCHEMATICS: ROTARY ACTUATORS
3 POSITION UNITS
SERIES 2000-8000
C2
C1
E
A
S1
S3
3C
S2
PORTS PRESSURIZED
C1 & C2
II
T°
I°
FULL CCW POSITION
R°
I
III
FULL CW POSITION
3 POSITION TANDEM UNITS
SERIES 2000-8000
D1
C2
D2
E
S2
S1
S3
PORTS PRESSURIZED
D1 & D2
II
T°
FULL CCW POSITION
J°
K°
I
III
FULL CW POSITION
3C-32
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
PLUMBING SCHEMATICS: ROTARY ACTUATORS
4 POSITION UNITS
SERIES 2000-8000
D1
D2
C1
E
A
S2
S1
S4
3C
S3
C2
PORTS PRESSURIZED
D1 & D2
T°
III
II
PORTS PRESSURIZED
C1 & C2
K°
I°
J°
FULL CCW POSITION
R°
I
IV
FULL CW POSITION
5 POSITION UNITS
SERIES 2000-8000
D1
D2
C2
C1
E
A
S2
B1
B2
S5
S1
S3
S4
PORTS PRESSURIZED
C1 & C2
III
PORTS PRESSURIZED
D1 & D2
T°
IV
II
PORTS PRESSURIZED
B1 & B2
P°
R°
I°
N°
K°
FULL CCW POSITION
I
J°
V
FULL CW POSITION
3C-33
(800) 624-8511
SOLUTIONS FOR
CAT-03
START-UP PROCEDURE: SERIES 1000-8000 ACTUATORS
ROTARY ACTUATORS
AIR/OIL TANDEM ROTARY ACTUATORS
CAUTION: Angular velocity and deceleration of actuators are
normally controlled with Port Control® valves and cushions.
1.
Mount Reservoir “A” vertically above actuator hydraulic
section. (Approximately 12 feet [3.6 m] of flexible tubing has
been provided to allow reservoir to be mounted in convenient
location.) Excess may be coiled up or cut off. Shortening of
tube should take place by disconnecting tube from tank taking
care that minimum amount is allowed to drain from reservoir
and that tube is kept full of oil at all times. A small air bubble
may form at end of tube when reassembled. This is not
detrimental and will disappear during operation of actuator.
2.
Provide constant air supply regulated to 20 psi [1.3 bar] to
port B on reservoir.
3.
Apply air pressure to reservoir. Next, LOOSEN (do not remove)
drain plug C. Allow oil to drain until level reaches line E.
Retighten plug securely.
4.
If actuator is equipped with cushions, open needle valves
marked D approximately 1/8 turn.
5.
Follow same procedure with port control needles marked P.
6.
Air pressure may now be applied to actuator. Take care to keep
clear from any tooling attached to the actuator shaft as it may
start rotating.
7.
Adjust control needles to achieve proper velocities (and
decelerations).
8.
Bleed plug G must not be loosened or removed as actuator will
lose oil charge.
At start-up, the actuator cylinders are often empty or not
pressurized. To prevent damage due to lack of governing media
and to assure a controlled start-up, the following procedure should
be used.
1.
After installation of actuator and auxiliary tooling (arms, jaws,
fixtures, etc.), manually turn output shaft fully clockwise prior
to start up. Actuator should be started-up with typical work
piece or load.
Apply pressure to rotary chamber in same direction as shaft is
turned (clockwise port).
3.
Apply pressure to opposite port and slowly open speed control
valve governing counterclockwise direction. This will allow the
actuator to rotate under control. Follow the same procedure in
opposite direction. Several cycles may be needed to obtain
proper speed adjustment.
3C
2.
4.
On units with adjustable cushions, set needle adjustment for
optimum effectiveness to minimize shock at end of rotation.
B
E
A
REGULATOR 20 psi [1.3 bar]
F
G
C
CAUTION:
PLEASE DO NOT TAMPER WITH FITTING ASSEMBLY.
CONTAINS CHECK VALVE WITH LOOSE COMPONENTS.
D
P
D
MAINTENANCE VIDEOS
Field Maintenance Videos on filling and bleeding Air/Oil
Tandem Actuators are now available. Contact your local PHD
distributor or call our toll free number: 1-800-624-8511.
3C-34
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
OPTIONS: SERIES 1000-8000 ROTARY ACTUATORS
P
PORT CONTROL®
The “built-in” speed control valve.
The exclusive PHD Port Control®, based on the “meter-out”
principle, features an adjustable needle and a separate ball check.
Both are built into the rotary actuator end cap and are used to
control the speed of the actuator over its entire rotation.
D
The self-locking needle has micrometer threads and is
adjustable under pressure. It determines the orifice size which
controls the exhaust volume only of the actuator proper. The
separate ball check is closed while fluid is exhausting from the
actuator, but opens to permit full flow of incoming fluids. The PHD
Port Control® provides the optimum in speed control for rotary
actuators. It saves space and eliminates the cost of fittings and
installation for external flow control valves.
ADJUSTABLE CUSHIONS
3C
PHD Cushions are designed for smooth deceleration at the end
of rotation. When the cushion is activated, the remaining volume in
the cylinder must exhaust past an adjustable needle which controls
the amount of deceleration. Effective cushion length is
approximately 30° of rotation, except on the 8000 Tandem which
has 20° of cushion length.
Cushions on Series 2000, 4000, 6000 and 8000 are furnished
on one of two racks only.
H
A
ZA MAX
ZC
ZB
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
ZD DIA
Adjusting screw(s) for reducing angle of rotation in either or
both directions for use where exact degree of desired rotation
cannot be predetermined or where requirements may vary during
operation. Standard adjusting screw will reduce angle of rotation up
to 30°. Available in conjunction with all other optional features.
Cushions are normally engaged over the last 30° of angle. The
use of angle adjusting screws to reduce angle of rotation has a
direct effect on the length of cushion engagement. Example: 10°
angle reduction will reduce cushion engagement by 10°. Angle
adjustments are standard on all Multi-Position Rotary Actuators.
SERIES
1000 & 2000
3000 & 4000
5000 & 6000
7000 & 8000
LETTER DIMENSION
ZA
ZB
ZC
1.125 .312 3/16 HEX
[29]
[8]
—
1.500 .375
1/4 HEX
[38]
[10]
—
1.875 .750
1/4 HEX
[48]
[19]
—
2.875 .937
3/4 FLAT
[73]
[24]
[19 mm]
H
0.00
[0]
.250
[6]
.203
[5]
.437
[11]
ZD
.875
[22]
1.250
[32]
1.250
[32]
1.750
[45]
NUMBERS IN [ ] ARE FOR METRIC UNITS AND ARE IN mm.
B
SHOCK PADS
Polyurethane pads for absorption of shock and noise are
available on each end of Series 1000-8000 Rotary Actuators.
Reducing shock permits higher piston velocities for shorter cycle
times. Reducing noise levels provides improved environment for
increased productivity. Pads eliminate metal-to-metal contact
between piston and end caps. NOTE: Air application only.
G
+.000
.187 -.010
+.000
-.254
SHAFT SEAL COVERS
SERIES
1000 & 2000
Not available on Rx6x and Rx9x models
3000 & 4000
Fits all PHD Series 1000-8000, except when ordering hollow
shafts. Isolates internal or external pressures. Maximum pressure
differential is 500 psi [34.4 bar]. Furnished installed on actuator only
(both sides). Covers are made of hard anodized aluminum. Not to be
used as a pilot.
A DIA
5000 & 6000
7000 & 8000
B REF
LETTER
A
B
1.875 .688
[47.63] [17.5]
3.000 1.688
[76.20] [42.9]
3.250 1.688
[82.55] [42.9]
4.480 3.312
[113.79] [84.1]
NUMBERS IN [ ] ARE FOR METRIC
UNITS AND ARE IN mm.
3C-35
(800) 624-8511
SOLUTIONS FOR
CAT-03
BASIC SHAFT DIMENSIONS: R1xx and R2xx
PA
PA
1
W KEYWAY
W KEYWAY
4
2
3
V DIA
V DIA
R1xx:
SINGLE SHAFT EXTENSION
(FRONT OF UNIT)
R2xx:
DOUBLE SHAFT EXTENSION
(FRONT & BACK OF UNIT)
PRELOADED KEYWAY SHAFT
3C
K
LETTER DIMENSION
IMPERIAL*
METRIC**
SERIES
PA
V
W
V
W
—
—
.875 .4998/.5003 1/8 x 1/16 x .625
1000 & 2000
[4 x 2.5 x 15]
[22] [12.69/12.71] [3.18 x 1.56 x 16] [12.00/11.97]
—
—
1.875 .8748/.8753 3/16 x 3/32 x 1.500
3000 & 4000
[6 x 3.5 x 32]
[48] [22.22/22.23] [4.75 x 2.36 x 38] [22.00/21.96]
—
—
1.875 1.124/1.125 1/4 x 1/8 x 1.500
5000 & 6000
[8 x 5 x 40]
[48] [28.55/28.58] [6.35 x 3.18 x 38] [28.00/27.96]
—
—
3.500 1.749/1.750 3/8 x 3/16 x 3.000
7000 & 8000
[12 x 5 x 56]
[89] [44.42/44.45] [9.53 x 2.36 x 76] [44.00/43.96]
NOTES:
1) SHAFT KEYWAY: SHOWN AT MID-ROTATION
2) *IMPERIAL SHAFT UNITS (Rx1x, Rx3x, Rx5x. Rx8x)
3) **METRIC SHAFT UNITS (Rx6x, Rx9R)
For use with Hub Adaptors. See Transition Plates & Stanchions
section.
E THREAD
F RAD
SERIES
F
1000 & 2000
C
.125
[3.2]
A
+.010 +.254
-.000 -.000
D THREAD
3000 & 4000
B MIN DIA
ALLOWABLE
R2xx UNITS: WHEN ORDERING SPECIFY -K-K FOR PRELOAD ON BOTH SHAFT EXTENSIONS. PRELOAD
WILL BE ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF SHAFT.
SET SCREW: INCLUDED WITH UNIT
C
5000 & 6000
7000 & 8000
F
.156
[4]
.220
[6]
.251
[6]
.438
[11]
F SLOT WIDTH
SERIES
1000 & 2000
3000 & 4000
5000 & 6000
7000 & 8000
B
A
BOTH ENDS
D DIA
A
LETTER DIMENSION
E
D
C
.250 3/8-24 10-32 x .312 DP
[M5 x 8]
[6.35] [M10]
.437 1/2-20 5/16-24 x .440 DP
[M8 x 11]
[11.11] [M12]
.563 5/8-11 3/8-24 x .560 DP
[M10 x 14]
[14.28] [M16]
1-8 1/2-20 x .687 DP
.875
[22.22] [M24] [M12 x 17.5]
CROSS KEY SHAFT
A SLOT DEPTH
E
H
B
1.500
[38.1]
2.000
[50.8]
3.000
[76.2]
4.000
[101.6]
A
.375
[9.5]
.812
[20.6]
.812
[20.6]
1.500
[38.1]
+.001 +.025
C -.000 -.000
BOTH ENDS
A
.250
[6.4]
.250
[6.4]
.437
[11]
.437
[11]
LETTER DIMENSION
B
C
D
E
.215 .230 .500 .118
[5.5] [5.8] [12.7] [3]
.265 .248 .875 .120
[6.7] [6.3] [22.2] [3]
.485 .500 1.125 .150
[12.3] [12.7] [28.6] [3.8]
.805 .875 1.750 .245
[20.4] [22.2] [44.5] [6.2]
F
.250
[6.3]
.248
[6.3]
.5002
[12.7]
.8752
[22.2]
R2xx UNITS: WHEN ORDERING SPECIFY -C-C FOR
CROSSKEY ON BOTH SHAFT EXTENSIONS
CROSSKEY: INCLUDED WITH UNIT
HOLLOW SHAFT
PB
LETTER DIMENSION
WA
VA
PB
A
—
.250
1.920
.042
1000 & 2000
—
[6.35]
[1.1] [48.76]
1/8 x 1/16
.500
2.917
.042
3000 & 4000
[12.7] [3.18 x 1.58]
[1.1] [74.09]
3/16 x 3/32
.687
2.730
.135
5000 & 6000
[3.4] [69.34] [17.46] [4.76 x 2.38]
1/4 x 1/8
1.125
4.520
.240
7000 & 8000
[6.1] [114.80] [28.57] [6.35 x 2.38]
A
SERIES
WA KEYWAY
THRU
+.002 +.050
VA -.000 -.000 DIA THRU
3C-36
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
MAGNETIC PISTON FOR USE WITH
PHD PROXIMITY SWITCHES
See page 3C-29 for Hydraulic Pressure Ratings with these options.
See each ordering data for magnetic piston ordering information.
Switches and brackets must be ordered separately.
See Switches and Sensors section for complete switch information.
M
Series 1000-8000 Rotary Actuators may be equipped with a
magnetic band (specify -E) on the pistons which activates externally
mounted PHD Hall Effect Switches. These switches allow the
interfacing of the PHD Actuators to various logic systems. This
option is for use with the following switches.
COMPACT HALL EFFECT SWITCHES
PART NO.
17503-2-06
17504-2-06
17523-2
17524-2
COLOR
Yellow
Red
Yellow
Red
DESCRIPTION
NPN (Sink) Type 4.5-24 VDC, 6 foot cable
PNP (Source) Type 4.5-24 VDC, 6 foot cable
NPN (Sink) Type 4.5-24 VDC, Quick Connect
PNP (Source) Type 4.5-24 VDC, Quick Connect
REED SWITCHES
The PHD Magnetic Reed Switches may be used in situations
where the Hall Effect Switches are not applicable. As with the Hall
Effect Switches, a magnetic band (specify -M) on the pistons
activates the externally mounted PHD Reed Switches. The Reed
Switches may be used to signal a programmable controller,
sequencer, relay, or in some cases, a valve solenoid. This option is
for use with the following switches.
COMPACT REED SWITCHES
PART NO.
17502-2-06
White
17509-3-06
Green
LIQUID RESISTANT HALL EFFECT SWITCH
17522-2
White
PART NO.
15902-1
17529-3
Green
DESCRIPTION
NPN (Sink) or PNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC
SWITCH BRACKETS
SERIES
1000 & 2000
3000 & 4000
5000 & 6000
7000 & 8000
J
PART NO.
COMPACT SWITCH
LIQUID RESISTANT
17000-32-5
5142-32-3
17000-34-5
5142-34-3
17000-38-0
5142-38-3
17000-39-0
5142-39-3
3C
E
DESCRIPTION
NPN (Sink) or PNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC,
6 foot cable
AC Type 110-120 VAC with Current Limit,
6 foot cable
NPN (Sink) or PNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC,
Quick Connect
AC Type 110-120 VAC, Quick Connect
with Current Limit
LIQUID RESISTANT REED SWITCHES
PART NO.
15900-1
15901-1
DESCRIPTION
10 Watt 4.5-24 VDC or 110-120 VAC
3 Amp 65-120 VAC
SENSOR/SET POINT MODULE
PHD offers a solid state sensor transducer along with a
Set Point Module which provides up to four adjustable sensing
positions throughout the 180° maximum sensing range. These
signals can be used as inputs to a programmable controller to signal
ends of rotation in addition to multiple signals during rotation for
indication of arc travelled.
The Set Point Module allows independent adjustment of each
sensing position and is available for 4.5 to 24 VDC current sinking
or current sourcing.
To order, specify -J option on Series 1000-8000 and -3 in the
appropriate option space for 018x50x and 018x75x.
SET POINT MODULE
PART NO.
9800-01-0300
9800-01-0400
DESCRIPTION
NPN (Sink) 4.5-24 VDC
PNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC
See Switches and Sensors section for information.
3C-37
(800) 624-8511
SOLUTIONS FOR
CAT-03
L
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
UNIDIRECTIONAL CLUTCH
R
CLOCKWISE UNIDIRECTIONAL
CLUTCH
Output hub rotates in one direction only. It remains motionless
while rack and pinion reverse. Clutch repeats within ±1/2°.
Assembly features a Torrington roller clutch. Spring loaded
brake shoes limit output shaft free wheeling, but are not intended for
stopping external loads.
CAUTION: Any angular error will accumulate; therefore, shot
pins or similar locators are necessary on index applications.
Maintain shot pin location during reversal of Rotary Actuator to
guarantee that clutch shaft does not move due to external forces or
slight internal friction in clutch.
Output hub will only rotate in counterclockwise
direction at specific rotation ordered.
Output hub will only rotate in clockwise
direction at specific rotation ordered.
3C
Overrun clutch for intermittent unidirectional shaft output,
available for Series 1000 through 6000.
R2xx
AUXILLARY
EXTENSION
R
ROTATION
1.656
[42]
2X A DIA THRU TO
ACTUATOR BODY
.375 [9.5]
.187 [4.7]
1
4
.500/.502 [12.70/12.75]
DIA x .437 [11.1] DP
.873/.875
[22.17/22.22] DIA
2
3
C
Q
1.625 [41] DIA
.125/.126
[3.17/3.20]
THRU DIA
1.250
[31.75]
E
D
OUTPUT HUB
L
ROTATION
LETTER DIMENSION
Q
E
D
C
A
.281 2.938 2.000 1.500 2.000
1000 & 2000
[7.2] [74.6] [51] [38] [50.8]
.344 4.188 3.000 2.000 3.000
3000 & 4000
[8.7] [106.3] [76] [50.8] [76.2]
.406 4.938 4.000 2.500 3.500
5000 & 6000
[10.3] [125.4] [102] [63.5] [88.9]
SERIES
LIMITING FACTORS
MAX. INLET
MAX. RADIAL OR
SERIES PRESSURE(psi)[bar] AXIAL LOAD (lb) [N]
1000
[22]
5
1052 [72]
2000
[22]
5
526 [36]
3000
10 [44]
372 [25]
4000
10 [44]
186 [13]
5000
15 [66]
174 [12]
6000
[6]
15 [66]
87
ABOVE INLET PRESSURES PROVIDE A MAXIMUM TORQUE
OF 414 in-lb [46.8 Nm] ALLOWED BY THE CLUTCH
PILOT VALVE ACTUATOR
N
The PVA functions as a built-in pneumatic limit switch. An air
pressure signal is provided at the end-of-piston travel as the piston
seal uncovers an orifice in the block. Upon reversal of piston travel,
the pilot pressure is shut off and the pilot line is vented through the
rotary actuator housing.
Air pilot signal is provided approximately .03 inch [1 mm] prior
to end of piston travel (or 10 to 15 degrees prior to end of rotation).
For pneumatic use only.
PVA ports are located in position 1 unless otherwise specified.
Not available in conjunction with angle adjustment -A option.
.500 [12.7]
MAX
.625 [16] SQ
2X 1/8 NPT [BSP]
PV TYP
PD
CW SIGNAL PORT
CCW SIGNAL PORT
1
4
2
3
3C-38
LETTER DIMENSION
PV
SERIES
PD STANDARD W/-B
2.191
1.848
1.000
1000 & 2000
[55.7]
[46.9]
[25.4]
2.847
2.410
1.500
3000 & 4000
[72.3]
[61.2]
[38.1]
3.436
2.978
1.500
5000 & 6000
[87.3]
[75.6]
[38.1]
4.409
3.770
2.500
7000 & 8000
[112]
[95.8]
[63.5]
PVA UNITS WILL REQUIRE A MINIMUM
ROTATION OF 45°
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
PORT & PORT CONTROL LOCATIONS
STANDARD PORT LOCATION on all Series 1000-8000
Actuators is position 2. STANDARD PVA (-N) LOCATIONS are
tubes I & II in position 1. STANDARD PORT CONTROL® AND
CUSHION ADJUSTMENT NEEDLES are located in end caps I & II
in position 1. Other port and adjusting needle locations are
available as specified.
Needles may not be located in same position as ports. See
page 3C-16 for needle positions Air/Oil Tandem Actuators. See 3C-4
for port and Port Control® positions on Miniature Rotary Actuators.
5
1
1
I
2
II
3
3
1
4
1
III
2
IV
3
PORT POSITION 1 TOP RACK
PORT POSITION 3 BOTTOM RACK
Y
This option positions the ports in position 1 on racks I & II and
in position 3 on racks III and IV. This allows access to the ports on
the “Top” and “Bottom” sides of the actuator.
V
W
Z1
4
2
3
I
4
2
TANDEM CAP ROTATED 180°
3C
4
This option rotates the cap of an Air/Oil Tandem Rotary
Actuator 180°. This places the Port Control (and Cushion) needles
and the Tandem fitting in position 2. Standard position for these is
position 4.
FLUORO-ELASTOMER SEALS
Fluoro-Elastomer seals are available for service up to 400°F
[204°C]. They may also be used to achieve seal compatibility with
certain fluids. Seal compatibility should be checked with the fluid
manufacturer for proper application.
CLOSE TOLERANCE ROTATION
This option may be specified when a precise rotation is
required and angle adjustment (see page 3C-35) is not acceptable.
By specifying this option, rotation will be within a tolerance of
+30, -0 minutes. Standard tolerance is -0°, +10° of rotation.
Electroless nickel plating is done on all externally exposed
ferrous parts except the pinion shaft. This optional plating treatment
gives an alternative method of protecting the unit from severe
environments.
NOTE: Standard plating is Zinc & Black Oxide.
ELECTROLESS NICKEL PLATING
MOUNTING FLANGE (HARDWARE INCLUDED)
F
4X E DIA
THRU
BOTTOM MOUNTING FLANGE
KIT NO.
IMPERIAL METRIC
SERIES
14320
1000 & 2000 13756
14321
3000 & 4000 13757
14322
5000 & 6000 13758
A
D
B C
LETTER DIMENSION
B
C
D
E
F
A
4.250 [108] 2.000 [51] 1.625 [41.3] 2.625 [66.7] .281 [7.1] .250 [6.3]
4.500 [114] 3.000 [76] 2.375 [60.3] 3.875 [98.4] .406 [10.3] .437 [11.1]
4.500 [114] 4.000 [102] 3.375 [85.7] 3.875 [98.4] .406 [10.3] .437 [11.1]
F
4X E DIA
THRU
SIDE MOUNTING FLANGE
A
D
SERIES
1000 & 2000
3000 & 4000
5000 & 6000
7000 & 8000
B C
KIT NO.
IMPERIAL METRIC
13759
14316
13760
14317
13761
14318
13762
14319
A
4.250
5.750
6.500
12.000
[108]
[146]
[165]
[305]
B
2.000 [51]
3.000 [76]
4.000 [102]
5.000 [127]
LETTER DIMENSION
C
D
1.375 [34.9] 3.625 [92.1]
2.125 [54.0] 5.125 [130.2]
3.375 [85.7] 5.875 [149.2]
3.000 [76.2] 10.000 [254.0]
E
.281 [7.1]
.406 [10.3]
.406 [10.3]
.781 [19.8]
F
.250 [6.3]
.437 [11.1]
.437 [11.1]
.750 [19.1]
G
.625 [15.9]
1.000 [25.4]
1.250 [31.8]
1.875 [47.6]
G DIA THRU
3C-39
(800) 624-8511
SOLUTIONS FOR
CAT-03
S
SAE PORTS FOR
HYDRAULIC FLUID
SAE Ports are available on most PHD hydraulic Rotary
Actuators. The Series 1000 & 2000 Rotary Actuators require a boss
which is brazed to the caps.
Dimensions for this boss are shown below. Consult PHD for
optional port position or units with Port Controls.
.650
[16.5]
SAE PORT THREAD
SEE CHART BELOW
.039
[1]
3C
.625 [15.9] DIA
PORT
SERIES
SIZE
1000 & 2000 7/16 - 20 SAE
3000 & 4000 7/16 - 20 SAE
5000 & 6000 9/16 - 18 SAE
7000 & 8000 3/4 - 16 SAE
3C-40
PORT BOSS REQUIRED TO
EXTEND ABOVE CAP SURFACE
ON SERIES 1000 & 2000 ONLY
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
INDEX:
ROTARY ACTUATORS
Ordering Data
Page 3D-2
SERIES RI
Benefits
Page 3D-3
Low Profile, High Force
Dimensions
Pages 3D-4 to 3D-9
Engineering Data
Pages 3D-10 & 3D-11
Options
Accessories
SERIES RIxH
Hollow Pinion
Actuator Selection
Sizing Example
Application Example
Page 3D-26
SERIES RI
Integral Air Lines for
Direct Pneumatic Coupling
3D-1
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/ri
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
HOLLOW PINION
H - Hollow Pinion
Leave blank
if standard
SERIES
I - Internal Passage
DESIGN NO.
1 - Imperial
5 - Metric
ROTATION
180°
ROTATION SPEED CONTROL
KIT NO.
69195
RIxx125
69198
RIxx525
69196
RIxx132
69199
RIxx532
69196
RIxx150
69199
RIxx550
NOTE: One port control fitting per kit
SHOCK
UNIT
ABSORBER
SIZE
KIT NO.
69146
RISxx25
69153
RIDxx25
69147
RISxx32
69154
RIDxx32
69147
RISxx50
69156
RIDxx50
NOTE:
1) Either optional angle adjustments or shock absorbers must be
ordered on all units. (Either option is mandatory.)
2) Switches and switch bracket kits must be ordered separately.
UNIT
SIZE
BORE Ø
25 mm
32 mm
50 mm
MID-POSITION
90°
On 3-position only
Must be specified
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
AB - Angle adjustment with shock
pad installed both ends
AC - Angle adjustment with shock
pad installed counterclockwise 90°
AW - Angle adjustment with shock
pad installed clockwise 90°
See note 1
KIT
NUMBER
71972
71997
71973
71998
71975
72000
OPTIONS
M - Reed Magnet,
Solid State
IT
NE
PRO
D
TO
M
O
pages for adders.
E
D
S
CT
U
F
CUSTOM ROTARY ACTUATORS ARE AVAILABLE.
PLEASE CONSULT PHD.
!
ROTATION SPEED CONTROL VALVE
PB - Rotational Speed Controls
both directions
PC - Rotational Speed Controls
counterclockwise
PW - Rotational Speed Controls
clockwise
RIx125
RIx525
RIx132
RIx532
RIx150
RIx550
Kits include:1 Porting Plate, 2 Locating Rings,
4 Fasteners, Required O-Rings
UNIT
SIZE
PORTING PLATE KITS
SHOCK ABSORBERS
NB - Shock installed both directions
NC - Shock installed counterclockwise
NW - Shock installed clockwise
See note 1
3 R I D H 1 25 x 180 x 90 - NB - PB - AB - M
THREE POSITION
UNITS
Only 90°
Mid-position on
Double Rack Units
are available.
PRODUCT
R - Rotary
TORQUE
AT 87 psi
32 in-lb [3.6 Nm]
63 in-lb [7.1 Nm]
207 in-lb [23.4 Nm]
64 in-lb [7.2 Nm ]
127 in-lb [14.3 Nm]
414 in-lb [46.8 Nm]
TYPE
CUS
T
www.phdinc.com/ri
BORE Ø
S
25 mm
SINGLE 32 mm
RACK
50 mm
25 mm
D
DOUBLE 32 mm
50 mm
RACK
TO ORDER SPECIFY:
Bore Size, Rotation, and Options.
3D
ORDERING DATA: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR
3D-2
SOLUTIONS FOR
BENEFITS: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR
COMMON BENEFITS
Series RI
■
Available in three sizes and six torque ranges from 32 to
414 in-lb at 87 psi [3.6 to 46.8 Nm at 6 bar] and are available
in either imperial or metric versions.
■
Provide 0 to 180 degrees rotation and are infinitely adjustable
throughout the entire range.
■
Body and hub locating sleeve pins provide accurate location.
■
Zero backlash at ends of rotation for precise rotary positioning.
■
Optional three position units are available providing 90° mid
position on double rack units only.
■
PHD Series 6790 Switches or proximity switch ready are
available for interfacing to electrical controls.
■
■
SERIES RI BENEFITS: INTEGRAL AIR LINES
■
Optional shock absorbers or bumpers provide quiet operation
and end of rotation deceleration.
Series RI Rotary Actuators incorporate internal air passages
within the rotary pinion manifold to allow pneumatic coupling
to other devices without tubing. Provides protection against
severed or damaged air lines eliminating downtime.
■
Optional port flow controls provide accurate control of
rotation speed.
Hub manifold interface provides from 4 to 8 passages through
the pinion for maximum flexibility.
■
Units incorporate a hollow pinion for routing and protecting
items such as electrical cable.
Series RIxH
■
Features enclosed inner tubing for protection from external
contaminants.
■
Porting plate accessory allows for quick and easy transition
between hub manifold and customer tooling or end effectors.
Available with a Hub Manifold
Interface or a Hollow Pinion
Cap Seal
Shock
Absorbers
SERIES RIxH BENEFITS: HOLLOW PINION
■
■
Series RIxH Rotary Actuators offer a hollow pinion which
provides routing and protection for electrical cables and air
lines.
Series RIxH Rotary Actuators provide a lower cost and lower
profile solution with a larger opening through the pinion.
SPECIFICATIONS
PISTON SEALS
PISTON
PINION SHAFT
RACKS
END CAPS
BODY
BEARINGS
PORTS
BREAKAWAY PRESSURE
LUBRICATION
WORKING PRESSURE
STANDARD ROTATIONS
BACKLASH
LIFE
OPERATING TEMPERATURE:
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT UNIT
SHOCK ABSORBER UNIT
ROTATION SPEED CONTROL UNIT
Cap
Piston
Body
Pinion
Cap
Unit Porting
(CW & CCW)
Series RI
Block Vee
Free Floating, Acetal Material
One Piece Alloy Steel with Center Through Hole
Alloy Steel
Hardcoated Aluminum
Two Radial Ball Bearings
NPT or BSPP
5 psi [0.35 bar]
100 psi [7 bar] Maximum
Fully Adjustable (0 to 180°)
No Backlash at end of Rotation
Designed for 5,000,000 Trouble-Free Cycles
OPTIONS
AB, AC, AW
-20° to 160°F [-28.9° to 71.1°C]
NB, NC, NW
32° to 150°F [0° to 65.6°C]
PB, PC, PW
5° to 160°F [-15° to 71.1°C]
Internal
Air Passages
Rack Assembly
THEORETICAL TORQUE
in-lb/psi [Nm/bar]
BORE SIZE
25
32
50
RIS .36 [.6] .73 [1.2] 2.37 [3.9]
RID .74 [1.2] 1.45 [2.4] 4.75 [7.8]
3D-3
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/ri
DIMENSIONS: SERIES RISH ROTARY ACTUATOR SINGLE RACK
A
A/2
C
E
4X J
4X M HOLE X N DEEP
RIxx25 & RIxx32 ONLY
4X L THREAD
8X L THREAD
FOR RIxx50 ONLY
5
B
D
6
4X G
Y THREAD THRU
ØU
2X F
4X H
2
4X K
FF
2X BB
2X EE
S
3D
R P
W
2X BB
AA
3
1
W
AA
T
V
Z
PINION DETAIL
4X CC
SEE PAGE 3D-18 FOR
T-SLOT DIMENSIONS
JJ PORT
2X DD
THREAD THRU
Z
JJ PORT
C
V
4
Y THREAD THRU
C
PORT PLUG
SEE PORT PLUG
DETAIL FOR
METRIC UNITS
2X Z
PORT PLUG
SEE PORT PLUG
DETAIL FOR
METRIC UNITS
Ø LL
Ø KK
MM
PORT PLUG DETAIL
FOR METRIC UNITS
GG
HH
PORT PLUG
PER DIN 908
T
Ø PP
SECTION CC
UNIT
SIZE
RISH125
RISH525
RISH132
RISH532
RISH150
RISH550
A
B
C
D
5.425
3.071
.472
3.031
[137.8] [78.0] [12.0] [77.0]
6.384
3.858
.630
3.819
[162.2] [98.0] [16.0] [97.0]
8.464
5.197
.630
5.157
[215.0] [132.0] [16.0] [131.0]
UNIT
SIZE
RISH125
RISH525
RISH132
RISH532
RISH150
RISH550
U
1.969
[50.0]
2.520
[64.0]
3.150
[80.0]
UNIT
SIZE
RISH125
RISH525
RISH132
RISH532
RISH150
RISH550
Ø PP
2.244
[57.0]
2.677
[68.0]
3.150
[80.0]
V
.731
[18.6]
.888
[22.6]
1.270
[32.2]
Ø KK
.677
[17.2]
.846
[21.5]
1.060
[26.9]
W
.618
[15.7]
.854
[21.7]
1.142
[29.0]
Ø LL
1.063
[27.0]
1.339
[34.0]
1.676
[42.6]
E
.472
[12.0]
.630
[16.0]
.630
[16.0]
Y
M14 x 1.5
M14 x 1.5
M20 x 1.5
M20 x 1.5
M20 x 1.5
M20 x 1.5
MM
.236
[6.0]
.276
[7.0]
.354
[9.0]
F
1.477
[37.5]
1.969
[50.0]
2.264
[57.5]
Z
.709
[18.0]
.787
[20.0]
1.535
[39.0]
G
.406
[10.3]
.758
[19.3]
.575
[14.6]
AA
.394
[10.0]
.650
[16.5]
.650
[16.5]
LETTER DIMENSION
J
K
H
.738
1.823 1.698
[18.7] [46.3] [43.1]
1.070 2.004 1.838
[27.2] [50.9] [46.7]
1.204 2.557 2.328
[30.6] [64.9] [59.1]
LETTER DIMENSION
CC TOL±
CC
BB
.0004
.4715
.197
[.01]
[11.98]
[5.0]
.0004
.4715
.197
[.01]
[11.98]
[5.0]
.0004
.7077
.419
[.01]
[10.6] [17.98]
L
M3 x 0.5
M3 x 0.5
M3 x 0.5
M3 x 0.5
M4 x 0.7
M4 x 0.7
M
.102
[2.6]
.102
[2.6]
—
—
DD
5/16-24
M8 x 1.25
5/16-24
M8 x 1.25
1/2-20
M12 x 1.75
N
.098
[2.5]
.118
[3.0]
—
—
EE
.157
[4.0]
.236
[6.0]
.666
[16.9]
P
1.398
[35.5]
1.890
[48.0]
2.638
[67.0]
FF
2.283
[58.0]
2.598
[66.0]
3.701
[94.0]
R
1.417
[36.0]
1.909
[48.5]
2.657
[67.5]
GG
.197
[5.0]
.315
[8.0]
.315
[8.0]
S
1.889
[48.0]
2.519
[64.0]
3.454
[87.7]
T
.417
[10.6]
.374
[9.5]
.543
[13.8]
HH
JJ
5.819
10-32
[147.8]
M5 x 0.8
7.014 1/8-27 NPT
[178.2] 1/8-28 BSPP
9.094 1/8-27 NPT
[231.0] 1/8-28 BSPP
METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ].
NOTES:
1) PORT POSITIONS INDICATED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS.
2) PINION AND HUB SHOWN AT MID ROTATION.
3D-4
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/ri
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
DIMENSIONS: SERIES RIDH ROTARY ACTUATOR DOUBLE RACK
E
8
2
3
7
1
4
5
6
2
2X Y THREAD THRU
THIS END
3
1
W
AA
2X Z
2X V
4X JJ PORT
THIS END
4
2X Z
5
PORT PLUG
SEE PORT PLUG
DETAIL FOR
METRIC UNITS
6
PORT PLUG DETAIL
FOR METRIC UNITS
PORT PLUG
PER DIN 908
GG
UNIT
SIZE
V
E
1.280
.731
RIDH125
[32.5] [18.6]
RIDH525
1.378
.888
RIDH132
[35.0] [22.6]
RIDH532
1.378
1.270
RIDH150
[35.0] [32.2]
RIDH550
METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [
W
.618
[15.7]
.854
[21.7]
1.142
[29.0]
].
LETTER DIMENSION
Y
Z
AA
M14 x 1.5
.709
.394
M14 x 1.5
[18.0]
[10.0]
M20 x 1.5
.787
.650
M20 x 1.5
[20.0]
[16.5]
M25 x 1.5
1.535
.650
M25 x 1.5
[39.0]
[16.5]
GG
.197
[5.0]
.315
[8.0]
.315
[8.0]
JJ
10-32
M5 x 0.8
1/8-27 NPT
1/8-28 BSPP
1/8-27 NPT
1/8-28 BSPP
NOTES:
3) FOR DIMENSIONS NOT GIVEN SEE RISH SINGLE RACK DIMENSION PAGE 3D-4.
3D-5
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/ri
DIMENSIONS: SERIES RIS ROTARY ACTUATOR SINGLE RACK
A
A/2
C
7
5
6
2X F
6
4X G
4
D
4X L THREAD
8X L THREAD
FOR RIxx50 ONLY
3
B
4X M HOLE X N DEEP
RIxx25 & RIxx32 ONLY
2
8
1
5
E
4X J
4X H
4X K
SEE PAGE 3D-8 FOR
PRESSURE OUTPUT
HUB INTERFACE
DIMENSIONS
Y THREAD THRU
ØU
2
FF
3D
2X BB
2X EE
S
R P
W
2X BB
AA
3
1
W
AA
T
V
Z
4X CC
SEE PAGE 3D-18 FOR
T-SLOT DIMENSIONS
JJ PORT
2X DD
THREAD THRU
Z
JJ PORT
2X Z
7
8
PORT PLUG
SEE PORT PLUG
DETAIL FOR
METRIC UNITS
2
1
PORT PLUG
SEE PORT PLUG
DETAIL FOR
METRIC UNITS
5
3
PORT PLUG
PER DIN 908
6
4
PORT PLUG DETAIL
FOR METRIC UNITS
SEE PAGE 3D-8 FOR
PRESSURE INPUT
HUB INTERFACE
DIMENSIONS
GG
HH
UNIT
SIZE
RIS125
RIS525
RIS132
RIS532
RIS150
RIS550
A
C
B
D
5.425
.472
3.071
3.031
[137.8] [78.0] [12.0] [77.0]
6.384
.630
3.858
3.819
[162.2] [98.0] [16.0] [97.0]
8.464
.630
5.197
5.157
[215.0] [132.0] [16.0] [131.0]
UNIT
SIZE
U
V
1.969
.731
RIS125
[50.0] [18.6]
RIS525
2.520
.888
RIS132
[64.0] [22.6]
RIS532
3.150 1.270
RIS150
[80.0] [32.2]
RIS550
W
.618
[15.7]
.854
[21.7]
1.142
[29.0]
].
E
.472
[12.0]
.630
[16.0]
.630
[16.0]
Y
M14 x 1.5
M14 x 1.5
M20 x 1.5
M20 x 1.5
M20 x 1.5
M20 x 1.5
F
1.477
[37.5]
1.969
[50.0]
2.264
[57.5]
Z
.709
[18.0]
.787
[20.0]
1.535
[39.0]
G
.406
[10.3]
.758
[19.3]
.575
[14.6]
AA
.394
[10.0]
.650
[16.5]
.650
[16.5]
V
4
Y THREAD THRU
LETTER DIMENSION
J
K
H
.738
1.823 1.698
[18.7] [46.3] [43.1]
1.070 2.004 1.838
[27.2] [50.9] [46.7]
1.204 2.557 2.328
[30.6] [64.9] [59.1]
LETTER DIMENSION
CC TOL±
CC
BB
.0004
.4715
.197
[.01]
[11.98]
[5.0]
.0004
.4715
.197
[.01]
[11.98]
[5.0]
.0004
.7077
.419
[.01]
[10.6] [17.98]
L
M3 x 0.5
M3 x 0.5
M3 x 0.5
M3 x 0.5
M4 x 0.7
M4 x 0.7
M
.102
[2.6]
.102
[2.6]
—
—
DD
5/16-24
M8 x 1.25
5/16-24
M8 x 1.25
1/2-20
M12 x 1.75
N
.098
[2.5]
.118
[3.0]
—
—
EE
.157
[4.0]
.236
[6.0]
.666
[16.9]
P
1.417
[36.0]
1.909
[48.5]
2.657
[67.5]
FF
2.283
[58.0]
2.598
[66.0]
3.701
[94.0]
R
1.398
[35.5]
1.890
[48.0]
2.638
[67.0]
GG
.197
[5.0]
.315
[8.0]
.315
[8.0]
S
1.889
[48.0]
2.519
[64.0]
3.454
[87.7]
T
.709
[18.0]
.787
[20.0]
.787
[20.0]
HH
JJ
5.819
10-32
[147.8]
M5 x 0.8
7.014 1/8-27 NPT
[178.2] 1/8-28 BSPP
9.094 1/8-27 NPT
[231.0] 1/8-28 BSPP
NOTES:
3D-6
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/ri
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
DIMENSIONS: SERIES RID ROTARY ACTUATOR DOUBLE RACK
E
8
2
3
7
1
4
5
SEE PAGE 3D-8 FOR
PRESSURE OUTPUT
HUB INTERFACE
DIMENSIONS
6
2
2X Y THREAD THRU
THIS END
3
1
W
AA
2X Z
2X V
4X JJ PORT
THIS END
4
PORT PLUG DETAIL
FOR METRIC UNITS
2X Z
5
6
3
8
4
7
6
5
2
1
PORT PLUG
PER DIN 908
PORT PLUG
SEE PORT PLUG
DETAIL FOR
METRIC UNITS
GG
SEE PAGE 3D-8 FOR PRESSURE INPUT
HUB INTERFACE DIMENSIONS
UNIT
V
E
SIZE
1.280
.731
RID125
[32.5] [18.6]
RID525
1.378
.888
RID132
[35.0] [22.6]
RID532
1.378
1.270
RID150
[35.0] [32.2]
RID550
W
.618
[15.7]
.854
[21.7]
1.142
[29.0]
].
LETTER DIMENSION
Y
Z
AA
M14 x 1.5
.709
.394
M14 x 1.5
[18.0]
[10.0]
M20 x 1.5
.787
.650
M20 x 1.5
[20.0]
[16.5]
M25 x 1.5
1.535
.650
M25 x 1.5
[39.0]
[16.5]
GG
.197
[5.0]
.315
[8.0]
.315
[8.0]
JJ
10-32
M5 x 0.8
1/8-27 NPT
1/8-28 BSPP
1/8-27 NPT
1/8-28 BSPP
NOTES:
3) FOR DIMENSIONS NOT GIVEN SEE RIS SINGLE RACK DIMENSION PAGE 3D-6.
3D-7
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/ri
DIMENSIONS: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR OUTPUT HUB
PRESSURE OUTPUT HUB O-RING INTERFACE
RIxx25
RIxx32
RIxx50
4X C THD x D DP
4X C THD x D DP
4X C THD x D DP
ØB
B
A
C
B
1
C
3
4
8X K°
6X K°
3
5
4X K°
2
1
L°
2
2
6
L°
1
ØA
8
A
L°
ØB
ØA
7
ØB
5
ØA
3
4
4
6
2X Ø H x R DP
ØE
ØJ
3D
4X Ø F x G DP
O-RING INTERFACE
2X Ø H x R DP
ØE
6X Ø F x G DP
O-RING INTERFACE
ØJ
2X Ø H x R DP
8X Ø F x G DP
O-RING INTERFACE
ØJ
ØE
6X (G)
4X (G)
8X (G)
PRESSURE INPUT PORT INTERFACE
RIxx25
6
4
7
5
3
3
4
3
8X K°
6X K°
4X K°
5
L°
8
L°
2
6
2
2
L°
8X N CUSTOMER PORT
6X N CUSTOMER PORT
4X N CUSTOMER PORT
4
RIxx50
RIxx32
1
1
1
ØM
ØP
ØM
ØP
UNIT
SIZE
C
A
B
A TOL ±
10-32
RIS125 & RID125 1.969 .002 1.378
[.05] [35.0] M5 x 0.8
[50]
RIS525 & RID525
1/4-28
RIS132 & RID132 2.520 .002 1.811
RIS532 & RID532 [64.0] [.05] [46.0] M6 x 1.0
5/16-24
RIS150 & RID150 3.150 .002 2.283
RIS550 & RID550 [80.0] [.05] [58.0] M8 x 1.25
NOTE:
D
.472
[12.0]
.610
[15.5]
.797
[20.2]
ØM
ØP
E
.512
[13.0]
.630
[16.0]
.906
[23.0]
LETTER DIMENSION
F
G
H
.177 .026 .2355
[4.5] [.7]
[5.98]
.197 .026 .3147
[5.0] [.7]
[7.99]
.276 .039 .3940
[7.0] [1.0] [10.01]
H TOL ±
J
.0003
.197
[.008] [5.0]
.0003
.276
[.008] [7.0]
.0003
.433
[.008] [11.0]
K°
90.0
90.0
60.0
60.0
45.0
45.0
L°
45.0
45.0
30.0
30.0
22.5
22.5
M
N
1.575
10-32
[40.0]
M5 x 0.8
1.811 1/8-27 NPT
[46.0] 1/8-28 BSPP
2.362 1/8-27 NPT
[60.0] 1/8-28 BSPP
P
2.244
[57.0]
2.677
[68.0]
3.150
[80.0]
R
.197
[5.0]
.315
[8.0]
.354
[9.0]
3D-8
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/ri
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
DIMENSIONS: 3-POSITION UNITS
DOUBLE RACK
SIZE 25, 32 & 50
FOR DIMENSIONS NOT SHOWN HERE:
SERIES RIxH SEE PAGES 3D-4 AND 3D-5
SERIES RI SEE PAGES 3D-6 AND 3D-7
PORT PLUG DETAIL FOR METRIC UNITS
PORT PLUG
PER DIN 908
2
KK
C
2X MM
1
3
5
6
NN
2X JJ PORT
(3 POSITION
CONTROL)
2X ZZ
GG
LL
2X JJ PORT
(UNIT CONTROL)
PP
6
4
3
PORT PLUG
SEE PORT PLUG
DETAIL FOR
METRIC UNITS
5
7
4
8
Z
2
AA
1
2X JJ PORT
(UNIT CONTROL)
A
(0-90-180°)
C B
A
B
P R
P R
NOTES:
3) MID POSITION HOLDING TORQUE ON DOUBLE RACK
UNITS IS 1/2 CATALOGED OUTPUT TORQUE.
C
PR
DOUBLE RACK DIMENSIONS
UNIT
SIZE
3RID125
3RID525
3RID132
3RID532
3RID150
3RID550
AA
.618
[15.7]
.854
[21.7]
1.142
[29.0]
JJ
10-32
M5 x 0.8
1/8-27 NPT
1/8-28 BSPP
1/8-27 NPT
1/8-28 BSPP
LETTER DIMENSION
KK
LL
MM
1.496
.354
.354
[38.0]
[9.0]
[9.0]
1.965
.492
.571
[49.9]
[12.5]
[14.5]
2.362
.591
.701
[60.0]
[15.0]
[17.8]
NN
.618
[15.7]
.854
[21.7]
1.142
[29.0]
ZZ
.807
[20.5]
1.161
[29.5]
1.870
[47.5]
UNIT
SIZE
3RID125
3RID525
3RID132
3RID532
3RID150
3RID550
LETTER DIMENSION
C
Z
GG
PP
.472
.709
.197
.295
[12.0] [18.0] [5.0]
[7.5]
.630 1.496 .315
.472
[16.0] [38.0] [8.0]
[12.0]
.630 1.890 .315
1.535
[16.0] [48.0] [8.0]
[39.0]
].
].
SOLUTIONS FOR
3D-9
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/ri
ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR
SPECIFICATIONS
3D
UNIT SIZE
RISxx25
RIDxx25
RISxx32
RIDxx32
RISxx50
RIDxx50
TORQUE AT 87 psi [6 bar]
in-lb
Nm
32
3.6
64
7.2
63
7.1
127
14.3
207
23.4
414
46.8
PISTON DIAMETER
in
mm
0.98
25
0.98
25
1.26
32
1.26
32
1.97
50
1.97
50
PISTON AREA
in2
cm2
0.76
4.90
0.76
4.90
1.25
8.06
1.25
8.06
3.04
19.61
3.04
19.61
AIR VOLUME (2 x 180)
in3
cm3
2.24
36.71
4.48
73.41
4.24
69.48
8.49
139.13
14.94
244.82
29.88
489.65
ANGLE OF ROTATION
All Series RI Rotary Actuators have a maximum pressure rating
of 100 psi [7 bar] with a 5 psi [0.3 bar] breakaway pressure. They
are for pneumatic application only.
Standard angle of rotation is 180°. Consult PHD for rotation
requirements above 180°. All units require angle adjustment or
shock absorber option which provide 90° adjustment from each end.
ROTATIONAL ALLOWANCE
Standard Series RI Rotary Actuators are recommended for use
in temperatures from -20° to +160°F [-28° to +71°C]. If a PHD
supplied external rotation speed control valve is used, the
temperature range is from 5° to 160°F [-15° to 71°C]. If a PHD
supplied shock absorber is used, the temperature range is from 32° to
150°F [0° to 66°C]. Consult PHD for temperatures beyond this range.
The rotational allowance of the Series RI Rotary Actuator is 7°
to 15° on the nominal specified rotation.
ROTATION RATES
The speeds given in the chart on page 3D-11 reflect one cycle of
180° with no load applied at 87 psi [6 bar]. Times given are average
and include the deceleration time through each type stopping method.
LUBRICATION
lubricated air.
BACKLASH
All units have 0° of backlash at ends of rotation.
CONTROLS
Control of output hub speed is extremely important as inertia
force is a function of rotational speed and distance from load to
output hub center. Flow controls and shock absorbers should be
considered when inertial loads are applied. See pages 3D-11
through 3D-15 for information on Series RI Rotary Actuator
controls. See pages 3D-19 through 3D-21 for information on load
stopping capacity.
BEARING LOADS TABLE
BACKLASH SPECIFICATIONS
UNIT
SIZE
RISxx25
RIDxx25
RISxx32
RIDxx32
RISxx50
RIDxx50
BACKLASH
REPEATABILITY
BACKLASH
THREE POSITION THREE POSITION
MID
UNIT
UNIT
ROTATION REPEATABILITY
+/- (degrees)
(degrees)
+/- (degrees)
+/- (degrees)
.26
.26
.23
.23
.21
.21
0.14
0.53
0.42
0.94
0.12
0.35
1.25
1.25
0.35
0.35
0.2
0.2
0.16
0.16
0.1
0.1
0.06
0.06
UNIT
SIZE
RISxx25
RIDxx25
RISxx32
RIDxx32
RISxx50
RIDxx50
MAXIMUM
AXIAL
PAYLOAD
lb
N
1300
292
1300
292
2275
511
2275
511
3100
697
3100
697
MAXIMUM RADIAL
PAYLOAD AT
MOUNTING SURFACE
lb
N
2546
572
2546
572
5365
1206
5365
1206
8229
1850
8229
1850
INPUT
PRESSURE
bar
psi
2.7
40
3.4
50
4.1
60
4.8
70
5.5
80
6.2
90
100 6.8
RISxx25
in-lb
Nm
14.7
1.7
18.4
2.1
22.1
2.5
25.8
2.9
29.5
3.3
33.2
3.7
36.9
4.2
RIDxx25
in-lb
Nm
29.5
3.3
36.9
4.2
44.2
5.0
51.6
5.8
59.0
6.7
66.3
7.5
73.7
8.3
UNIT SIZE
RISxx32
RIDxx32
Nm
Nm
in-lb
in-lb
29.1
3.3
58.2
6.6
36.4
4.1
72.7
8.2
43.6
4.9
87.3
9.9
50.9
5.8
101.8 11.5
58.2
6.6
116.4 13.1
65.4
7.4
130.9 14.8
72.7
8.2
145.4 16.4
RISxx50
in-lb
Nm
95.1
10.7
118.9
13.4
142.7
16.1
166.4
18.8
190.2
21.5
214.0
24.2
237.8
26.9
RIDxx50
Nm
in-lb
190.2
21.5
237.8
26.9
285.3
32.2
332.9
37.6
380.4
43.0
428.0
48.4
475.5
53.7
3D-10
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/ri
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR
ROTARY ACTUATOR WEIGHT TABLES
ROTARY ACTUATOR ROTATION RATE TABLE
(NO LOAD CONDITIONS)
SINGLE AND DOUBLE
ROTARY ACTUATORS
UNIT
ACTUATOR WEIGHT
SIZE
lb
kg
1.36
3
RISxx25
1.59
3.5
RIDxx25
3.44
7.6
RISxx32
3.63
8
RIDxx32
6.48
14.3
RISxx50
6.80
15
RIDxx50
3 POSITION
ROTARY ACTUATORS
UNIT
ACTUATOR WEIGHT
SIZE
lb
kg
1.86
4.1
3 RIDxx25
4.36
9.6
3 RIDxx32
7.98
17.6
3 RIDxx50
UNIT
SIZE
RISxx25
RIDxx25
RISxx32
RIDxx32
RISxx50
RIDxx50
ROTATION RATES at 87 psi
(seconds maximum)
shock
speed
pad
control shock
0.18
0.18
0.13
0.23
0.41
0.23
0.31
0.11
0.11
0.32
0.30
0.28
0.29
0.22
0.13
0.78
0.40
0.28
MANIFOLD PINION SPECIFICATIONS
UNIT
SIZE
RISx25
RIDx25
RISx32
RIDx32
RISx50
RIDx50
NUMBER OF
PASSAGES
4
4
6
6
8
8
FLOW THROUGH
PASSAGES @ 87 psi [6 bar]
Liter/Min
CFM
1
28.3
1
28.3
1.3
36.8
1.3
36.8
1.5
42.5
1.5
42.5
CENTER THROUGH HOLE
DIAMETER
in
mm
5
0.197
5
0.197
7
0.276
7
0.276
11
0.433
11
0.433
3D-11
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/ri
AB
ANGLE ADJUSTMENTS WITH
SHOCK PAD INSTALLED BOTH ENDS
AC
SHOCK PAD INSTALLED
COUNTERCLOCKWISE 90°
AW
ANGLE ADJUSTMENTS WITH SHOCK
PAD INSTALLED CLOCKWISE 90°
Angle adjustment options and/or shock absorber options must
be ordered on each unit. Both provide mechanical stops and angle
adjustment of -90° from both ends of rotation.
The standard rotation for Series RI is 180°. The ability to adjust
over a wide range eliminates the need to order special units for
specific angles of rotation.
The angle adjustment screw has a shock pad as standard
providing quiet actuator operation in less demanding applications.
In more demanding applications, the optional shock absorbers
should be specified to handle the higher energy dissipation.
LETTER DIMENSION
UNIT
B
A
C
SIZE
.200
.551
2.578
RISx125
[5.1]
[14.0]
[65.5]
RISx525
.240
.787
3.392
RISx132
[6.1]
[20.0]
[86.2]
RISx532
.310
.787
3.373
RISx150
[7.9]
[20.0]
[85.7]
RISx550
D
.770
[19.6]
1.100
[27.9]
1.360
[34.5]
UNIT
LETTER DIMENSION
SIZE
B
A
C
.369
1.770
.551
RIDx125
[9.4]
[45.0]
[14.0]
RIDx525
.424
2.644
.787
RIDx132
[10.8] [67.2]
[20.0]
RIDx532
.505
2.625
.984
RIDx150
[12.8] [66.7]
[25.0]
RIDx550
D
1.094
[27.8]
1.375
[34.9]
1.750
[44.5]
UNIT
SIZE
RISxx25
RIDxx25
RISxx32
RIDxx32
RISxx50
RIDxx50
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
KIT NO.*
69223-01
69230-01
69226-01
69231-01
69226-01
69233-01
*ANGLE ADJUSTMENT KITS INCLUDE:
FOR RISxx UNITS - 1 ANGLE ADJUSTMENT SCREW AND 1 NUT
FOR RIDxx UNITS - 1 ANGLE ADJUSTMENT SCREW, 1 NUT,
1 THREAD SEAL AND 1 SEAL WASHER
1 KIT REQUIRED PER END OF ADJUSTMENT DESIRED.
2X B
2X A
2X C
2X D
2
7
3
8
1
4
5
6
2X B
2X A
2X C
2
3
8
1
7
2X D
4
5
6
3D
OPTIONS: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR
3D-12
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/ri
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
BOTH DIRECTIONS
8
7
CLOCKWISE DIRECTION
6
Either angle adjustment options and/or shock absorber options
must be ordered on each unit. Both provide mechanical stops and
angle adjustment of -90° from both ends of rotation.
The shock absorber options provide maximum deceleration
control and rotational stopping ability. The -NB, -NC, and -NW
options provide the rotary actuator with the shock absorber factory
installed in the Series RI rotary actuator. See pages 3D-19 through
3D-21 for details on unit stopping capacity with installed shock
absorbers. Reference the Shock Absorber Specifications Chart for
nominal effective angle of rotation in each direction.
2
2X B
DOUBLE RACK
2X A
2X C
1
2
4
7
8
3
2X D
5
NW
2X C 2X D
1
4
2X A
3
NC
2X B
SINGLE RACK
5
NB
6
LETTER DIMENSION
A
B
C
UNIT
.369 2.039
.551
RID125
[9.4] [51.8]
[14.0]
RID525
.424 2.515
.787
RID132
[10.8] [63.9]
[20.0]
RID532
.505 3.176
.984
RID150
[12.8] [80.7]
[25.0]
RID550
LETTER DIMENSION
A
B
UNIT
D
C
.770
.200 2.847
.551
RIS125
[19.6]
[5.1] [72.3]
[14.0]
RIS525
1.100
.240 3.263
.787
RIS132
[27.9]
[6.1] [82.9]
[20.0]
RIS532
1.360
.310 3.924
.787
RIS150
[34.5]
[7.9] [99.7]
[20.0]
RIS550
NOTE: FOR RISxxx UNITS WITH CUSHION USE RIDxxx DIMENSION L
D
1.094
[27.8]
1.375
[34.9]
1.750
[44.5]
UNIT
SIZE
RISxx25
RIDxx25
RISxx32
RIDxx32
RISxx50
RIDxx50
SHOCK
ABSORBER
KIT NO.
69146
69153
69147
69154
69147
69156
THREAD
TYPE
mm
M14 x 1.5
M14 x 1.5
M20 x 1.5
M20 x 1.5
M20 x 1.5
M25 x 1.5
STROKE
mm
in
.50
12.7
.50
12.7
.75
19.1
.625 15.9
.75
19.1
.91
23.1
KINETIC
ENERGY
LOAD
in-lb
Nm
150
17
150
17
225
25
225
25
225
25
1860
210
SHOCK
ABSORBER
WEIGHT
lb
kg
.12 .05
.12 .05
.28 .13
.28 .13
.28 .13
.76 .34
SHOCK
ABSORBER
LENGTH
in
mm
3.59 91.2
3.59 91.2
4.67 118.6
4.67 118.6
4.67 118.6
5.51 140.0
ACROSS
WRENCH
FLATS
mm
in
.49
.49
.69
.69
.69
.88
12.4
12.4
17.5
17.5
17.5
22.2
SHOCK
ABSORBER
EFFECTIVE
ANGLE
30
30
70
60
55
70
SHOCK ABSORBERS KITS INCLUDE:
FOR RISxx UNITS - 1 SHOCK AND 1 NUT
FOR RIDxx UNITS - 1 SHOCK, 1 NUT, 1 THREAD SEAL,
AND 1 SEAL WASHER
1 KIT REQUIRED PER END OF ADJUSTMENT DESIRED
NOTE: The shock absorber doubles as the rotation adjustment.
Shock absorbers or angle adjustment option must be installed in the
rotary actuator prior to operating the unit. Operation of units without
installed shocks or angle adjustment can damage the units and void
any and all warranties. Only shock absorbers specified by PHD
should be used in Series RI Rotary Actuators. The use of any other
shock absorbers will affect actuator performance and life
expectancy.
PHD recommends replacing shocks every 1,000,000 cycles to
maintain peak actuator performance and life.
SOLUTIONS FOR
3D-13
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/ri
PB
BOTH DIRECTIONS
PC
3D
PW
LETTER DIMENSION
UNIT
B
A
C
D
SIZE
.984
.827
.197
.630
RIxx125
[25.0] [21.0]
[5.0]
[16.0]
RIxx525
1.614
1.043
.069
.817
RIxx132
[41.0] [26.5]
[1.8]
[20.8]
RIxx532
1.693
1.043
.069
.743
RIxx150
[43.0] [26.5]
[1.8]
[18.9]
RIxx550
CLOCKWISE DIRECTION
The PHD Series RI offers optional external compact flow
control fittings for adjusting output hub rotation speed. The speed of
the hub is controlled by regulating the cylinder exhaust. The control
fittings are unidirectional flow control valves where intake air flows
freely through the flow control and exhaust is metered out through
an adjustment screw. Intake capacity is slightly greater than the full
open exhaust capacity, enabling maximum variation of hub rotation
speed.
The PHD Series RI flow control fittings are mounted directly to
the caps and provide an integral tube fitting connection. They also
swivel 360° around the ports, easing tube routing installation.
Rotational velocities are adjusted and maintained by the captivated
fine adjustment screw with a locking nut to ensure precise velocity
control and repeatability in output hub rotation speed.
UNIT
SIZE
RIxx125
RIxx525
RIxx132
RIxx532
RIxx150
RIxx550
E
.394
[10.0]
.650
[16.5]
.650
[16.5]
F
.156
[4.0]
.250
[6.4]
.250
[6.4]
KIT NO.
69195
69198
69196
69199
69196
69199
1 KIT REQUIRED PER END
OF ADJUSTMENT DESIRED
NOTE: ONE PORT CONTROL
FITTING PER KIT
A
Ø F TUBE SIZE
B
C
D
E
NOTE: Flow control fitting is effective between 15 to 100 psi
[1.0 to 7.0 bar] and from 5° to 160°F [-15° to 71.1°C].
M
MAGNETS FOR PHD 6790 SOLID
STATE AND REED SWITCHES
SOLID STATE SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS
for use with PHD Series 6790 Solid State Switches. These switches
mount easily to the actuator using the switch slots in the sides of
the body.
PHD Series 6790 Solid State and Reed Switches are designed
specifically to provide an input signal to various types of
programmable controllers or logic systems. See Switches and
Sensors section for ordering information on the Series 6790
Switches.
UNIT
SIZE
RIxxx25
RIxxx32
RIxxx50
REPEATABILITY
(degree)
0.6
0.6
0.4
UNIT
SIZE
RIxxx25
RIxxx32
RIxxx50
REPEATABILITY
(degree)
0.6
0.8
0.6
HYSTERESIS
(degree)
10.6
9.3
5.9
BAND WIDTH
(min. degree) (max. degree)
31
50
28
51
26
42
REED SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS
HYSTERESIS
(degree)
9.5
7.4
5.1
BAND WIDTH
(min. degree) (max. degree)
44
27
43
26
36
26
SOLID STATE SWITCHES
PART NO.
67903-1-02
67903-1-05
67923-1
67904-1-02
67904-1-05
67924-1
NPN
NPN
NPN
PNP
PNP
PNP
DESCRIPTION
4.5 - 30 VDC, 2 m cable
4.5 - 30 VDC, 5 m cable
4.5 - 30 VDC, Quick Connect
4.5 - 30 VDC, 2 m cable
4.5 - 30 VDC, 5 m cable
4.5 - 30 VDC, Quick Connect
REED SWITCHES
PART NO.
67902-1-02
67902-1-05
67922-1
SWITCH INTO GROOVE
IN EITHER SIDE
DESCRIPTION
PNP or NPN 4.5 - 30 VDC, 2 m cable
PNP or NPN 4.5 - 30 VDC, 5 m cable
PNP or NPN 4.5 - 30 VDC, Quick Connect
3D-14
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/ri
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
ACCESSORIES: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR
EXTERNAL PROXIMITY SWITCHES
This accessory provides for the external mounting of round
metal sensing proximity switches. One switch mounting kit is
required per switch and includes the plastic bracket with the
required mounting hardware. A steel switch target is also included
in each external proximity switch mounting kit.
The Series RI body accepts up to four external proximity
switches. The typical application requires two switch mounting kits,
however, if the three position model has been ordered, the three
position switch bracket kit must also be ordered. This kit utilizes the
top target groove in the hub and therefore positions the proximity
switch higher from the body.
Proximity switches are supplied by the customer, see chart
below for switch diameter specifications, dimension C.
Ø C PROXIMITY SWITCH
BRACKET ASSEMBLY
3RIxxx25 ONLY
STANDARD BRACKET
3 POSITION BRACKET
A
STANDARD BRACKET
A
B
LETTER DIMENSION
UNIT
B
C
A
SIZE
.197
.504
.413
RIxx125
[12.8] [10.5] [5.0]
RIxx525
.197
.571
.452
RIxx132
[14.5] [11.5] [5.0]
RIxx532
.315
.748
.571
RIxx150
[19.0] [14.5] [8.0]
RIxx550
3 POSITION BRACKET
A
VIEW AA
UNIT
STANDARD PROXIMITY
SIZE
KIT NO.
69181
RIxxx25
69182
RIxxx32
69184
RIxxx50
STANDARD PROXIMITY KITS INCLUDE:
1 TARGET ASSEMBLY
- 1 CAM PIN
- 1 TARGET
1 BRACKET OR BRACKET ASSEMBLY WITH
REQUIRED MOUNTING HARDWARE
UNIT 3 POSITION PROXIMITY
SIZE
KIT NO.
70207
3 RIDxx25
70208
3 RIDxx32
70209
3 RIDxx50
3 POSITION PROXIMITY KITS INCLUDE:
1 TARGET ASSEMBLY
- 1 CAM PIN
- 1 TARGET
1 BRACKET OR BRACKET ASSEMBLY WITH
REQUIRED MOUNTING HARDWARE
3D-15
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/ri
PORTING PLATE
FASTENER
LOCATION MARK
CUSTOMER PORTING PLATE
LOCATING RING
O-RING
This accessory provides a convenient conversion from the
manifold output hub interface to a threaded port interface. It allows
the use of the manifold hub feature of the Series RI Rotary Actuator,
without the need to drill communication holes through the attached
tooling. It also allows the plumbing of secondary actuators using the
fittings and tubing of your choice.
The Porting Plate is made from 6061-T6 aluminum and is
machined on all sides insuring flat and parallel mounting surfaces.
Four drilled and tapped holes are provided to attach your tooling.
Location accuracy is maintained through the use of locating rings
and dowel pin holes.
The Porting Plate also features numbered ports corresponding
to the rotary actuator input ports. A location mark keeps proper port
alignment simple during assembly.
LOCATION MARK
RIxx25 UNIT SHOWN AT MID-ROTATION
3D
SCREW
REQUIRED
SIZE
SCREW TORQUE
KIT
(SHCS)
UNIT NUMBER
in-lb
Nm
10-32 x .5
75
8.5
RIx125 71972
75
8.5
RIx525 71997 M5 x 0.8 x 12
1/4-28 x .75
150
16.9
RIx132 71973
150
16.9
RIx532 71998 M6 x 1.0 x 22
28.2
RIx150 71975 5/16-24 x .875 250
28.2
RIx550 72000 M8 x 1.25 x 25 250
KITS INCLUDE:1 PORTING PLATE, 2 LOCATING RINGS,
4 FASTENERS, REQUIRED O-RINGS
SERIES RIxx25
SERIES RIxx32
PORT ID # ON ALL SIDES
C
F
E
A
F
4X THRU
AND COUNTERBORE
FOR H SHCS
K
4X L
RADIUS
4X A
G
SERIES RI
ROTARY PORT
INTERFACE
G
E
A
4X THRU AND COUNTERBORE
FOR H SHCS
A
ØJ
K
4X L
RADIUS
ØJ
LOCATION
MARK
Ø M THRU
ØN
2X Ø R THRU
(ON Ø N BOLT
4X 45°
HOLE CIRCLE)
CUSTOMER
MOUNTING 6X D PORT
4X U THREAD THRU
(ON Ø S BOLT HOLE CIRCLE)
CUSTOMER MOUNTING
2X Ø R THRU
(ON Ø N BOLT HOLE CIRCLE)
CUSTOMER MOUNTING
2X 15°
4X 45°
4X D PORT
SERIES RIxx50
G
A
F
E
A
Ø M THRU
ØS
ØN
B
B
K
4X L
RADIUS
4X THRU AND COUNTERBORE
FOR H SHCS
A
ØJ
4X B
Ø M THRU
ØS
ØN
4X 45°
A
8X D PORT
4X U THREAD
CUSTOMER MOUNTING
SERIES RI ROTARY
PORT INTERFACE
LOCATION MARK
2X Ø R THRU
(ON Ø N BOLT HOLE CIRCLE)
CUSTOMER MOUNTING
ØS
C
4X U THREAD
CUSTOMER MOUNTING
SERIES RI
LOCATION MARK
ROTARY PORT
INTERFACE
A
UNIT
SIZE
A
RIx125 .138
RIx525 [3.5]
RIx132 .571
RIx532 [14.5]
RIx150 .315
RIx550 [8.0]
LETTER DIMENSION
B
C
D
—
—
10-32
—
—
[M5 x 0.8]
.945
.413
1/8 NPT
[24.0] [10.5] [1/8 BSPP]
1.024
—
1/8 NPT
[26.0]
— [1/8 BSPP]
UNIT
SIZE
G
RIx125 .197
RIx525 [5.0]
RIx132 .276
RIx532 [7.0]
RIx150 .433
RIx550 [11.0]
LETTER DIMENSION
H
J
K
1.378 1.969
10-32
[M5 x 0.8] [35.0] [50.0]
1/4-28
1.811 2.559
[M6 x 1.0] [46.0] [65.0]
5/16-24
2.283 2.953
[M8 x 1.25] [58.0] [75.0]
UNIT
SIZE
RIx125
RIx525
RIx132
RIx532
RIx150
RIx550
E
.472
[12.0]
.906
[23.0]
.984
[25.0]
F
.197
[5.0]
.276
[7.0]
.433
[11.0]
L
M
1.181 .197
[30.0] [5.0]
1.496 .276
[38.0] [7.0]
1.732 .433
[44.0] [11.0]
LETTER DIMENSION
S
U
N
R
1.496 .1252 2.047
10-24
[38.0] [3.005] [52.0] [M5 x 0.8]
1.969 .1252 2.598
1/4-20
[50.0] [3.005] [66.0] [M6 x 1.0]
2.126 .2503 2.913
5/16-18
[54.0] [6.007] [74.0] [M8 x 1.25]
].
3D-16
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/ri
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
MANIFOLD O-RING SEAL KIT
This accessory provides the necessary O-rings to fit the
manifold hub of the Series RI Rotary Actuator. This allows the rotary
actuator to easily interface to customer supplied tooling. The
O-rings are 70 durometer, Buna-N rubber.
MANIFOLD O-RING SEAL KIT SPECIFICATIONS
UNIT
SIZE
RIxx25
RIxx32
RIxx50
O-RING
MANIFOLD
KIT NO.
69202
69203
69205
NUMBER OF
O-RINGS
O-RING
IN KIT
SIZE
2 mm I.D. x 1 mm C.S.
10
3 mm I.D. x 1 mm C.S.
10
4 mm I.D. x 1.5 mm C.S.
10
LOCATION RINGS
These accessories provide accurate body and hub positioning.
The location sleeve fits into either the top or bottom H7 tolerance
counter bore holes on the PHD Series RI body or hub. They provide
dowel pin accuracy without requiring the additional space for a
dowel. Location rings allow either through bolt or tapped body
mounting to be used. The mounting bolt is placed through the
location ring, simultaneously securing and locating the mating parts.
The body locating ring kit consist of two hardened and ground
steel sleeves sized to press into the H7 tolerance counter bored
holes on either the top or bottom of the Series RIS body.
The hub locating ring kit consists of two hardened and ground
steel sleeves, sized to press into the hub counter bores located on
the top of the Series RI hub.
PINION LOCATING RING KIT
2X G PINION
LOCATING RING I.D.
ØG ØH
.197 .354
[5.0] [9.0]
.236 .354
[6.0] [9.0]
.315 .591
[8.0] [15.0]
2
8
1
7
4
5
6
F TOL.
+.0001/-.0007
+[.003]/-[.018]
+.0001/-.0007
+[.003]/-[.018]
+.0001/-.0007
+[.003]/-[.018]
3
BODY LOCATING RING KIT
E
A
UNIT
BODY LOCATING RING
SIZE
KIT NO.
69210
RIxxx25
69210
RIxxx32
69212
RIxxx50
BODY LOCATING RING KITS INCLUDE
2 LOCATING RINGS
D
2X F
4X C
A
PINION LOCATING RING
UNIT
KIT NO.
SIZE
69216
RIxxx25
69217
RIxxx32
69219
RIxxx50
PINION LOCATING RING KITS INCLUDE
2 LOCATING RINGS
2X B
5
4
7
6
4X H BODY
LOCATING RING I.D.
8
3
2
UNIT
LETTER DIMENSION
SIZE
B
ØF
A
ØC
C TOL.
E
D
.236 2.953 .472 +.0002/-.0005 .118 1.378 .236
RIxx125
[6.0] [75.0] [12.0] +[.005]/-[.013] [3.0] [35.0] [6.0]
RIxx525
.236 3.937 .472 +.0002/-.0005 .079 1.811 .315
RIxx132
[6.0] [100.0] [12.0] +[.005]/-[.013] [2.0] [46.0] [8.0]
RIxx532
.349 4.528 .709 -.0002/-.0006 .276 2.283 .394
RIxx150
[8.9] [115.0] [18.0] -[.005]/-[.015] [7.0] [58.0] [10.0]
RIxx550
NOTE: LOCATING RINGS ARE TO BE PRESSED INTO BODY AND PINION
1
BODY LOCATING RING KIT
SOLUTIONS FOR
3D-17
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/ri
T-NUTS
L
NON-USABLE
SLOT LENGTH
T-nuts allow the rotary actuator to be mounted from the side of
the unit. T-nuts can be positioned at any point along the t-slot
grooves which are 90° to the pinion hub.
INSERT NUTS ON THIS END
OF UNIT, EITHER SIDE.
SLOT DIMENSIONS
TYPICAL BOTH SIDES (POSITION 1 & 3)
2X D
4X C
2X A
NUT DIMENSIONS
K THREAD
2X B
E
K THREAD
H
H
3D
J
F
J
A
.177
[4.5]
.240
[6.1]
.240
[6.1]
SLOT DIMENSION
B
C
.315 .079
[8.0] [2.0]
.472 .088
[12.0] [2.2]
.472 .088
[12.0] [2.2]
D
.138
[3.5]
.157
[4.0]
.157
[4.0]
-xx = -00 INDICATES STANDARD PLATING
NUT DIMENSIONS
K
H
J
.252 .217 M3 x 0.5
[6.4] [5.5]
.137 .472 M4 x 0.7
[3.5] [12.0]
.137 .472 M4 x 0.7
[3.5] [12.0]
G
E
F
— .095 —
— [2.4] —
.216 .374 .050
[5.5] [9.5] [1.3]
.216 .374 .050
[5.5] [9.5] [1.3]
F
Sizes 32 & 50
Size 25
UNIT
SIZE
RIxx125
RIxx525
RIxx132
RIxx532
RIxx150
RIxx550
G
M
L
.472
[12.0]
.669
[17.0]
.669
[17.0]
M
.630
[16.0]
.787
[20.0]
.984
[25.0]
NUT
PART NO.
3204-022
63759-xx
63759-xx
-03 INDICATES -Z1 PLATING
APPLICATION EXAMPLES
LATHE LOADER
CAM SHAFT FINISHING PROCESS
In this application, a combination of a slide, two grippers, and
a rotary actuator load and unload parts from a lathe. One Series
190 Gripper grasps a blank part on a holding rack while another
Series 190 Gripper grasps a finished part in the lathe. A Series SK
Slide extends out, and the finished part is removed from the lathe
while the blank part is removed from the holding rack. A Series RI
Rotary Actuator then rotates clockwise. The slide retracts, the blank
part is loaded into the lathe, and the finished part is released into a
holding bin. The Series RI Rotary Actuator is beneficial for this
application due to its high torque output and the capability of
routing airlines and switch cables through the pinion. This feature
eliminates any external airlines, which could wear or sever causing
catastrophic damage.
In this application, two grippers are combined with a Series RI
Rotary Actuator to load and unload cam shafts into a grinding
machine for finishing. First a Series SK Slide, mounted to a gantry,
will provide the reaching motion as a Series
5300 Gripper picks up the unfinished cam
shaft. The Series RI Rotary Actuator
rotates the grasped cam to the top
position. The gantry then cycles back
to the grinding machine, the
second gripper is extended down
into the machine to pick up the
finished cam shaft, the slide
retracts, the rotary actuator
rotates the grippers and
shafts, and the unfinished
cam is loaded into the
machine. Finally the
finished cam shaft is moved
and placed in a completion
tray on a conveyor. The
Series RI Rotary Actuator is
ideal for this application
due to its high torque
output and the capability of
routing airlines and switch
cables through the pinion.
3D-18
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/ri
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
ROTARY ACTUATOR SELECTION: SERIES RI
SIZING AN RI UNIT WITH
ANGLE ADJUSTMENTS
STEP 1
Determine Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (Jm)
Select the illustration from the application types on page
3D-22 that most resembles your specific application. Several
separate calculations may be necessary to fully describe your
application. Using the appropriate application equation,
calculate the mass moment of inertia for the type of condition
illustrated. The total mass moment of inertia is the sum of the
individual calculations.
STEP 2
Determine Necessary Acceleration (αs)
This equation calculates the acceleration required to move the
desired rotation in the desired time. The solution is given in
radians/sec2.
.035 x Rotation Angle in Degrees
Acceleration (rad/sec2) = αS =
STEP 5
Compare Peak Velocity (ω) to Allowable Impact
Compare your peak velocity to the maximum allowable
velocity for the given Mass Moment of Inertia (Jm) of your
application. The chart is labeled Shock Pad Energy
Capacity. The charts represent the total amount of energy that
is able to be absorbed and provide acceptable motion of the
actuator. Acceptable motion is defined as a maximum of one
degree of motion reversal when the load comes to end of
stroke. Note: You may run slightly higher velocities and loads
than these charts provide and not damage the unit; however,
you may find the motion profile unacceptable. Please contact
PHD if you are considering using the Series RIx actuator
outside of the recommended energy range and shock
absorbers are not a desired option. If the shock pad does not
provide enough stopping capacity for your application, go to
the next sizing section titled “Sizing a RIx Unit with Shocks.”
SHOCK PAD ENERGY CAPACITY
ALLOWABLE IMPACT VELOCITY (rad/sec)
STEP 3
Calculate the Required Starting Torque (TA)
3D-22 that most resembles your specific application.
Several separate calculations may be necessary to fully describe
your application. Using the appropriate application equation,
calculate the torque for each for each type of condition
illustrated that matches your application. The total torque will
be the sum of the individual calculations. Note: Torque
calculations are theoretical, an appropriate safety factor
should be considered. PHD recommends a minimum safety
factor of 2 to account for friction loss, airline and valve size,
and attached accessories.
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
25 mm
1.0
0
Starting Torque (in/lb) = TA, TAg
Balanced Load TA = Jm x αA x SF
UnBalanced Load TAg = [(Jm x αA) + (Fg x k)] x SF
50 mm
32 mm
0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
[.0565] [.113] [.170] [.226] [.283] [.339] [.396] [.452] [.508] [.565]
ATTACHED LOAD, Jm (in-lb sec2) [Nms2]
STEP 4
Calculate the Peak Velocity (ω)
This formula estimates the peak velocity of the Series RIx in
operation, and is used to determine the stopping capacity of
the rotary actuator. The solution is given in radians/sec.
Average Velocity (deg/sec) = Rotational Angle in Degrees
Time of Rotation in Seconds
UNIT
SIZE
RISxx25
RIDxx25
RISxx32
RIDxx32
RISxx50
RIDxx50
Peak Velocity (rad/sec)
.045 x Average Velocity
3D-19
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/ri
SIZING AN RI UNIT WITH SHOCKS
STEP 6
Compare your peak velocity to the maximum allowable
application. The chart is labeled Shock Energy
degree of motion reversal when the load comes to end of
stroke. Note: You may run slightly higher velocities and loads
than these charts provide and not damage the unit; however,
you may find the motion profile unacceptable. Please contact
PHD if you are considering using the Series RIxxx actuator
outside of the recommended energy range.
3D
SHOCK ENERGY CAPACITY
30.0
RISx25 and RIDx25
VELOCITY (rad/sec)
25.0
RISx32
20.0
15.0
10.0 RIDx32
5.0
0
0
0.5
[.057]
1.0
[.113]
1.5
[.170]
2.0
[.226]
2
2.5
[.283]
3.0
[.339]
2
Moment of Inertia (in-lb sec ) [Nms ]
50.0
RISx32 and RIx32
VELOCITY (rad/sec)
40.0
RISx32
30.0
25.0
20.0
15.0
STEP 8
Calculate the Propelling Energy (Pe)
These formulas calculate the additional amount of energy that
the shock will experience due to the piston force of the actuator.
Pe = Propelling Energy
UNIT
SIZE
in/lb
Nm
RISxx25 .1902 x psi .3116 x bar
RIDxx25 .3804 x psi .6233 x bar
RISxx32 .935 x psi 1.5321 x bar
RIDxx32 1.621 x psi 2.6556 x bar
RISxx50 2.283 x psi 3.7411 x bar
STEP 9
Calculate the Total Energy (Et)
This formula sums all of the energies that the shock will experience.
Total Energy Et (in/lb [Nm]) = Ke + Pe
STEP 10
Compare the Total Energy (Et) to the Maximum Total Energy (Em)
and also Acceptable Motion (Ea)
If Acceptable Motion is desired as defined in STEP 6, the total
energy should be less than both of the charted values given
below. If some additional bounce is acceptable, (Et) can be up
to the same value as (Em). If not, go to a larger actuator or
contact PHD for application assistance.
STEP 11
Calculate Energy per Hour (Eh)
Compare your applications energy per hour requirement
against the charted maximum.
Energy/Hour (in/lb [Nm]) = Cycles/Hour x Et
MAX ALLOWABLE CHART (Em)
45.0
35.0
STEP 7
Calculate the Kinetic Energy (Ke)
This formula calculates the kinetic energy of your application.
This value will be used to calculate the actual total energy to be
compared to the maximum allowable total energy.
Kinetic Energy (in/lb [Nm]) = Ke = 1/2 Jm ω2
UNIT
SIZE
RISxx25
RIDxx25
RISxx32
RIDxx32
RISxx50
RIDxx50
RIDx32
10.0
5.0
0
0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
[.057] [.113] [.170] [.226] [.283] [.339] [.395] [.452] [.508] [.565]
Moment of Inertia (in-lb sec2) [Nms2]
30.0
RISx50 and RIDx50
RISx50
VELOCITY (rad/sec)
25.0
15.0
RIDx50
10.0
5.0
0
1.0
[.113]
Nm
8.5
8.5
25.4
25.4
25.4
210.2
Energy/Hour
Nm/Hr
in-lb/Hr
33,890
300,000
33,890
300,000
45,190
400,000
45,190
400,000
45,190
400,000
67,791
600,000
ACCEPTABLE MOTION CHART (Ea)
UNIT
SIZE
RISxx25
RIDxx25
RISxx32
RIDxx32
RISxx50
RIDxx50
20.0
0
Ke*
in-lb
75
75
225
255
225
1860
2.0
[.226]
3.0
[.339]
4.0
[.452]
5.0
[.565]
6.0
[.678]
Moment of Inertia (in-lb sec2) [Nms2]
7.0
[.791]
Ke*
in-lb
64.4
75.0
155.0
205.0
225.0
663.7
Nm
7.3
8.5
17.5
23.2
25.4
75.0
Velocity
rad/sec
27.5
15.7
47.1
20.9
28.8
19.6
*Acceptable motion is defined as a maximum of one degree of motion
reversal when the load comes to end of stroke.
3D-20
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/ri
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
DETERMINING ALLOWABLE ATTACHED
LOAD WEIGHT
Following are the steps required to determine the allowable
attached load weight on the Series RIx rotary actuator. You will need
to know the weight of the attached load, the orientation of the rotary,
and the center of gravity distance of the load from the hub face.
Please refer to the supplied formulas to determine each of the
allowable conditions.
STEP 12
Determine Allowable Attached Load Weight (Lf)
The next step in determining the proper Series RIx
actuator size is to determine the bearing capacity of the
unit according to your application requirements.
STEP 13
Calculate Maximum Actuator Radial Loading (Lm)
This formula calculates the maximum radial loading allowed for
the Series RI actuator based on 5,000,000 cycles and the axial
load (La) that you are placing on the bearings. Note: Center of
Gravity distance is different depending on if the unit is
horizontal or vertical. In horizontal applications, (Cg) is the
distance from the mounting face of the hub to the (Cg) of the
load. In vertical applications, (Cg) is the distance from the
centerline of the hub to (Cg) of the load.
STEP 15
Calculate the Deceleration (αd)
This formula calculates the deceleration of the unit based on
the peak velocity of the individual actuator. The solution is
given in radians/sec2
UNIT SIZE αd = Deceleration (rad/sec2)
RIxxx25
ω2/1.032
RISxx32
ω2/2.571
RIDxx32
ω2/2.229
RISxx50
ω2/1.920
RIDxx50
ω2/2.330
STEP 16
Calculate Stopping Torque (Td)
This is the kinetic energy used to stop a rotary load to your
application conditions. This formula is one of the components
required when comparing reaction forces on the bearing. Using
the identical illustrations and formulas on pages 3D-21 and 3D-22
used when calculating the required starting torque, replace the
acceleration value with the deceleration value. This is the
reaction torque required to stop the load. PHD recommends a
safety factor of 1 to 1.25.
Stopping Torque (in/lb) = TA, TAg
Balanced Load TA = Jm x αd x SF
Unbalanced Load TAg = [(Jm x αd) + (Fg x k)] x SF
La = Axial Load Weight (lb)
Cg
Horizontal Orientation (in)
(Cg) = Distance from Face of Hub to
Center of Gravity of Load
STEP 17
Calculate Radial Bearing Load At Stopping (LS)
This formula converts the sum torque’s of the propelling torque
and stopping torque into the reaction force on the two
bearings.
Cg
Vertical Orientation (in)
(Cg) = Distance from Centerline of Hub
to Center of Gravity of Load
Radial Bearing Load at Stopping (LS)
UNIT
lb
N
SIZE
(Tp + Td)/.96875 (Tp + Td)/.0246
RIxxx25
(Tp + Td)/1.1667 (Tp + Td)/.0296
RIxxx32
(Tp + Td)/1.5625 (Tp + Td)/.0399
RIxxx50
Max Actuator Radial Loading (Lm)
UNIT
SIZE
IMPERIAL
METRIC
-36.0024 (La) + 125042.4
-1.4175 (La) + 1106.86
Lm =
49.1 + Cg
1.933 + Cg
-46.0702 (La) + 340706.2
RIxxx32 Lm = -1.8138 (La) + 3015.57 Lm =
63.5 + Cg
2.5 + Cg
RIxxx50 Lm = -2.699 (La) + 6573.92 Lm = -68.5696 (La) + 742656
90.25 + Cg
3.553 + Cg
RIxxx25 Lm =
STEP 14
Calculate Propelling Torque (Tp)
This formula is one of the components required when
comparing reaction
Propelling Torque (Tp)
UNIT
forces on the
in-lb
Nm
SIZE
bearing. You may
.6047 x bar
RISxx25 .369 x psi
use the formula or
RIDxx25 .737 x psi 1.2077 x bar
simply look up the
RISxx32 .727 x psi 1.1913 x bar
torque produced by
1.454 x psi 2.3827 x bar
RIDxx32
the rotary actuator at
RISxx50 2.378 x psi 3.8969 x bar
a specified pressure.
STEP 18
Calculate Max. Fixed Radial Load (Lf)
This formula will produce the maximum radial load weight that
can be safely attached to the rotary actuator, given the axial
load weight and (Cg) distance of your application.
Max Fixed Radial Load (Lf) = Lm - Ls
STEP 19
Compare (Lf) to Actual Load Affixed to Actuator (Lr)
Compare the (Lf) value to the weight of the attached load. If the
attached load is less than the (Lf) value, the actuator is correct
for your application. If the attached load is greater than the (Lf)
value, go to the next size actuator and rerun the above
calculations until the (Lf) value is greater than the attached
load weight.
Lr = Weight of Attached Load
3D-21
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/ri
IMPERIAL UNITS:
t = time (sec)
SF = Safety Factor
METRIC UNITS:
t = time (sec)
SF = Safety Factor
BALANCED LOADS
T = Jm x α x SF
Disk
Disk
Solid Sphere
Mounted on center
3D
Mounted on center
L
k
k
k
2
Jm = Fg x k
g
2
1
Fg
x
x
4
g
Jm =
LOAD ORIENTATION
2
( L3 + k )
Jm =
2
2 Fg
x
x k2
5
g
Rectangular Plate
Rod
Mounted on center
Mounted on center
k dim is
radius
of rod
b
(with gravity)
a
a
(without gravity)
UNBALANCED LOADS
UNBALANCED LOADS
T = Jm x α x SF
Point Load
2
T = Jm x α x SF
Rectangular Plate
Rod
Mounted off center
Mounted off center
k dim is
radius
of rod
8
Fg2
3
7
2
2
Jm = Fg x a + 3k
12
g
2
2
Jm = Fg x a + b
g
12
4
c
Fg2
b
b
k
Jm =
Fg
x k2
g
Fg
a
Fg1
2
2
2
2
Jm = Fg1 x 4a + c + Fg2 x 4b + c
g
g
12
12
a
Jm =
(Fg
g1
Fg1
2
2
Fg2 (4b2 + 3k2)
x (4a + 3k ) +
x
g
12
12
)(
)
3D-22
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/ri
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
SIZING EXAMPLE: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR
APPLICATION INFORMATION - EXAMPLE 1
Weight = 32.2 lb
Rotation Angle = 180°
Pressure = 87 psi
Orientation = Horizontal
Center of Gravity Distance = 2"
Desired Cycle Rate = .75 sec
Safety Factor: Acceleration = 2
Deceleration = 1
Axial Load = Ø
Radial Load (Lr) = 32.2 lb
Cycles per Minute = 40
k
4.00
k
6Ø
EXAMPLE 1
STEP 8 Calculate Propelling Energy (Pe)
Determine Required Starting Torque for Application
RISx25 = .1902 x psi
Pe = .1902 x 87 = 16.55 in-lb
STEP 1 Determine (Jm)
Fg k2
32.2 32
x
=
Jm =
x
g
2 386.4 2
STEP 9 Calculate Total Energy (Et)
Et = Ke + P e
Et = 21.87 + 16.55 = 38.42 in-lb
2
Jm = .0833 x 4.5 = .375 in-lb-sec
STEP 2 Determine (αA)
αA = .035
αA = .035
STEP 10 Compare Maximum Total Energy (Em) to Total Energy (Et)
and Acceptable Motion Energy to Total Energy
Em ≥ E t
75 ≥ 38.42
Angle Rotation
in Degrees
Time of Rotation
in Seconds2
Ea ≥ Et
180
= 11.2 rad/sec2
(.75)2
64.4 ≥ 38.42
SHOCKS WILL PERFORM AS DESIRED
STEP 3 Starting Torque
STEP 11 Calculate Energy per Hour (Eh)
T = Jm x αA x SF
T = .375 x 11.2 x 2 = 8.4 in-lb
RISxx25 WILL PRODUCE SUFFICIENT TORQUE
Cycles/Hr = Cycles/min x 60
Cycles/Hr = 40 x 60 = 2400
Eh = 2400 x 38.42 in-lb = 92,208 in-lb/hr
Check for Stopping Capacity
300,000 ≥ 92,208
STEP 4 Calculate Peak Velocity (ω)
RISxx25
ω = .045 x Average Velocity (refer to chart pg. 19)
STEP 12 Calculate Allowable Attached Load Weight
Axial Load from Application = La
180
= 10.8 rad/sec
.75
STEP 5 Compare to Graph (refer to pg.3D-19)
ω = .045 x
La = Ø
STEP 13 Calculate Max Actuator Radial Loading (Lm)
Determine Cg Distance = 2"
SHOCK PAD WILL NOT PERFORM AS DESIRED
This velocity is greater than the shock
pad allows, go to the section labeled
“Sizing an RIx Unit with Shocks”
Lm =
-1.4175 (La) + 1106.86
1.933 + Cg
Lm = 281.43 lb
STEP 6 Compare Peak Velocity to Allowable Impact Velocity for
a given (Jm) Load using Shock Absorbers
Compare to graph on page 3D-20.
RISx is acceptable for this application.
STEP 14 Calculate Propelling Torque (Tp)
Tp = .369 x psi
Tp = .369 x 87 psi = 32.103 in-lb
STEP 7 Calculate Kinetic Energy (Ke)
STEP 15 Calculate Deceleration (αd)
Ke = 1/2 x Jm x ω2
Ke = 1/2 x (.375) x (10.8)2 = 21.87 in-lb
αd = ω2/1.032
αd = (10.8)2/1.032
αd = 113.0 rad/sec2
3D-23
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/ri
EXAMPLE 1 CONT.
STEP 16 Calculate Stopping Torque (Td) (from STEP 7
pg. 3D-20)
Td = Jm x αd x SF
Td = .375 x 113.0 x 1 = 42.375
STEP 18 Calculate Max Fix Radial Load (Lf)
Lf = L m - L s
Lf = 281.43 - 76.88
Lf = 204.54
Td = 42.375
STEP 19 Compare Max Fix Radial Load (Lf) to Actual Load Affixed to
Actuator (Lr)
Lf ≥ L r
204.54 ≥ 32.2 lb
RISxx25 FITS THIS APPLICATION
STEP 17 Calculate Radial Bearing Load at Stopping (Ls)
(from chart pg. 3D-21)
Ls = (Tp + Td)/.96875
Ls = (32.103 + 42.38)/.96875
Ls = 76.88 lb
3D
gripper
Weight = 15 lb mounting plate & two - 8 lb grippers
Pressure = 65 psi
Orientation = Vertical
Center of Gravity Distance = 10"
Desired Cycle Rate = 1.25 sec
Safety Factor: Acceleration = 2
Deceleration = 1
Cycles per Minute = 20 cyc/min = 1200 cyc/hr
Axial Load (La) = 31 lb
Radial Load (Lr) = Ø
24"
4"
10"
gripper
mounting
plate
EXAMPLE 2
Determine Required Starting Torque for Application
Check for Stopping Capacity
STEP 4 Calculate Peak Velocity (ω)
STEP 1 Determine (Jm)
for Mounting Plate
RIDxx32
ω = .028 x Average Velocity
180
ω = .028 x
= 4.032 rad/sec
1.25
STEP 5 Compare Peak Velocity to Allowable Impact Graph
(pg. 3D-19)
This velocity is in the range of shock pads
but not with the attached load Jm of 6.055
it is closer to handling .25 in-lbs2, go to
“Sizing an RIxx Unit with Shocks”
a2 + b2
Jm = g x
12
15
(24)2 + (4)2
x
Jm =
12
386.4
Fg
Jm = .0388198 x 49.333
Jm = 1.9151 in-lb-sec2
Jm for 2 Point Loads (Gripper)
Jm =
Fg
g
STEP 6 Compare Peak Velocity to Allowable Impact Velocity for
a given (Jm) Load using Shock Absorbers
Compare to graph on page 20.
RIDxx32 is acceptable for this application.
x k2
8
x 102 = 2.0704 in-lb-sec2
386.4
Total Jm = 1.9151 + 2(2.0704)
Jm = 6.056 in-lb-sec2
STEP 2 Determine (αA)
STEP 7 Calculate Kinetic Energy (Ke)
Ke = 1/2 x Jm x ω2
Ke = 1/2 (6.056) x (4.032)2 = 49.225 in-lb
180
= 4.032 rad/sec2
(1.25)2
STEP 3 Starting Torque
TA = Jm x αA x SF
αA = .035
TA = 6.056 x 4.032 x 2
TA = 48.836 in-lb
RIDxx32 WILL PRODUCE SUFFICIENT TORQUE
3D-24
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/ri
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
EXAMPLE 2 CONT.
STEP 14 Calculate Propelling Torque (Tp) (refer to chart
pg. 3D-20)
RIDx32 =
Tp = 1.454 x psi
Tp = 1.454 x 65 psi = 94.51 in-lb
STEP 8 Calculate Propelling Energy (Pe)
RIDx32 = 1.621 x psi
Pe = 1.621 x (65 psi) = 105.37 in-lb
STEP 9 Calculate Total Energy (Et)
Et = Ke + Pe
Et = 49.225 + 105.37 = 154.6 in-lb
STEP 15 Calculate Deceleration (αd)
STEP 10 Compare Maximum Total Energy (Em) to Total Energy (Et)
Em ≥ Et
Ea ≥ Et
αd = 7.29 rad/sec2
225 ≥ 154.6
225 ≥ 154.6
STEP 16 Calculate Stopping Torque (Td) (from STEP 7
pg. 3D-20)
Td = 6.056 x 7.29 x 1
Td = 44.15 in-lb
SHOCK WILL PERFORM AS DESIRED
STEP 11 Calculate Energy per Hour (Eh)
Cycles/Hr = Cycles/min x 60
Cycles/Hr = 40 x 60 = 2400
STEP 17 Calculate Radial Bearing Load at Stopping (Ls) (refer to
chart pg. 3D-21)
Eh = 2400 x 154.6 in-lb = 371,040 in-lb/Hr
Ls = (Tp + Td)/1.1667
371,040 ≤ 400,000
Ls = 138.7/1.1667
Ls = 118.8 lb
STEP 12 Calculate Allowable Attached Load Weight
Axial Load Weight = 31 lb = (La)
STEP 18 Calculate Max Fix Radial Load (Lf)
Lf = Lm - Ls
STEP 13 Calculate Max Actuator Radial Loading (Lm)
Determine Cg Distance = 10"
Lm =
Lm =
αd = ω2/2.229
αd = (4.032)2/2.229
Lf = 236.75 - 118.8
Lf = 117.95 lb
-1.8138 (La) + 3015.57
2.5 + Cg
STEP 19 Compare Max Fix Radial Load (Lf) to Actual Load Affixed t
to Actuator (Lr)
-1.8138 (31) + 3015.57
= 236.75 lb
2.5 + 10
Lf ≥ Lr
117.95 lb ≥ 31 lb
RIDxx32 FITS THIS APPLICATION
3D-25
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/ri
APPLICATION EXAMPLE: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR
LATHE LOADER
3D
In this application, a combination of a slide, 2 grippers, and a
rotary actuator load and unload parts from a lathe. One Series 190
Gripper grasps a blank part on a holding rack while another Series
190 Gripper grasps a finished part in the lathe. A Series SK Slide
extends out, and the finished part is removed from the lathe while
the blank part is removed from the holding rack. A Series RI Rotary
Actuator then rotates clockwise. The slide retracts, the blank part is
loaded into the lathe, and the finished part is released into a holding
bin. The Series RI Rotary Actuator is beneficial for this application
because of its integral airlines. This feature eliminates any external
airlines, which could wear or sever causing catastrophic damage.
CAM SHAFT FINISHING PROCESS
In this application, two grippers are combined with a Series RI
Rotary Actuator to load and unload cam shafts into a grinding
machine for finishing. First a Series SK Slide, mounted to a gantry,
will provide the reaching motion as a Series 5300 Gripper picks up
the unfinished cam shaft. The Series RI Rotary Actuator rotates the
grasped cam to the top position. The gantry then cycles back to the
grinding machine, the second gripper is extended down into the
machine to pick up the finished cam shaft, the slide retracts, the
rotary actuator rotates the grippers and shafts, and the unfinished
cam is loaded into the machine. Finally the finished cam shaft is
moved and placed in a completion tray on a conveyor. The Series RI
Rotary Actuator is ideal for this application due to the integral air
lines which eliminate the flexing and twisting of external lines. If
crimped, cut, or pulled loose it could result in the dropping of the
part into a valuable grinding machine.
3D-26
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/ri
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
INDEX:
ROTARY ACTUATORS
SERIES RF
Ordering Data
Page 3D-28
NEW!
Benefits
Page 3D-29
Low Profile Design Provides High Torque
Dimensions
Pages 3D-30 and 3D-31
Engineering Data
Page 3D-32
Options
Accessories
Rotary Actuator
Selection
Sizing Example
3D-27
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/rf
www.phdinc.com/rf
TYPE
S - Pneumatic
BORE
SIZE
14 mm
20 mm
25 mm
ROTATION SPEED CONTROL VALVE
PB - Rotational Speed Controls both directions
PC - Rotational Speed Controls counterclockwise
PW - Rotational Speed Controls clockwise
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
DESIGN NO.
1 - Imperial
5 - Metric
KIT NO.
69700
69700
69702
LENGTH
2 meter cable
5 meter cable
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
18431-001-02 NPN 10 - 30 VDC with 2 meter cable
18431-002-02 PNP 10 - 30 VDC with 2 meter cable
6mm SQUARE INDUCTIVE PROXIMITY SWITCHES
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
55802-1-02 NPN or PNP 4.5 - 24 VDC with 2 meter cable
NPN or PNP 4.5 - 24 VDC with Quick Connect
55822-1
SERIES 5580 REED SWITCHES
DESCRIPTION
NPN 4.5 - 24 VDC with 2 meter cable
PNP 4.5 - 24 VDC with 2 meter cable
NPN 4.5 - 24 VDC with Quick Connect
PNP 4.5 - 24 VDC with Quick Connect
SERIES 5580 HALL EFFECT SWITCHES
NE
PRO
D
TO
M
O
IT
CUS
T
F
PART NO.
17533-00-02
17533-00-05
CORDSETS WITH QUICK CONNECT
UNIT
RFSx14
RFSx20
RFSx25
PROXIMITY SWITCH KITS
NOTE: One Rotational Speed Control fitting per kit.
ROTATION SPEED CONTROL REPLACEMENT KITS
IMPERIAL NO.
METRIC NO.
UNIT
RFSx14
68946-01
68947-01
RFSx20
RFSx25
68946-03
68947-03
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
(Standard)
AB - Angle adjustment with shock pad
installed both ends
This option must be ordered with the unit.
PART NO.
55803-1-02
55804-1-02
55823-1
55824-1
ROTATION
180°
NOTE:
1) Switches and switch kits must be ordered separately.
SERIES
F - Low Profile
E
D
S
CT
U
!
pages for adders.
CUSTOM ROTARY ACTUATORS
ARE AVAILABLE. PLEASE CONSULT PHD.
OPTIONS
Q19 - Hollow Pinion
R F S 1 25 x 180 - PB - AB - Q19
PRODUCT
R - Rotary
TO ORDER SPECIFY:
Bore Size, Rotation, and Options.
3D
ORDERING DATA: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR
3D-28
SOLUTIONS FOR
BENEFITS: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR
BENEFITS
■
Series RF Rotary Actuators feature a low profile body design
with a large output mounting hub to cover a wide range of
applications.
■
Available in three sizes with a standard rotation of 180° and
torque ranging from 7 to 67 in-lb at 100 psi [0.8 to 7.7 Nm
at 7 bar].
■
The Series RF rack and pinion design features high tensile
steel racks and a one-piece pinion/output hub providing
durability and long life.
■
Zero backlash at ends of rotation for precise rotary positioning.
■
Appropriate PHD Series SHP Slides and Series GRT Grippers
bolt directly to the Series RF output hub.
■
All units feature built-in standard angle adjustments and are
infinitely adjustable from 0 - 180° of rotation.
■
Standard internal urethane shock pads provide quiet operation
and end of stroke deceleration with precise repeatability
provided by a hard stop .
■
Standard through mounting holes in the body are threaded to
provide versatility and ease of mounting of the actuator.
■
Available in imperial and metric versions for flexibility of
design for a world market.
Direct Mounting for
PHD Series GRT
Grippers and Series
SHP Slides
One Piece Pinion
and Output Hub
■
Optional switch kits allow the use of either PHD Series 5580
switches or Series 18431 6 mm square inductive proximity
switches for easy interfacing to electrical controls.
■
Optional port flow controls provide accurate control of
rotation speed.
Sealed
Radial Bearing
Switch Slot
Switch Target Groove
One Piece Piston and Rack
Double Rack
and Pinion Drive
Angle Adjustment with
Integral Shock Pad
(as Standard)
SPECIFICATIONS
PISTON SEALS
PISTON
PINION SHAFTS
RACKS
END CAPS
BODY
BEARINGS
PORTS
BREAKAWAY PRESSURE
LUBRICATION
WORKING PRESSURE
STANDARD ROTATIONS
BACKLASH
LIFE
OPERATING TEMPERATURE
SERIES RF
Block Vee
One Piece with Rack
One Piece Alloy Steel with Integral Output Hub
Alloy Steel
Hard Coated Aluminum
Radial Ball Bearing
NPT [BSPP]
Under 15 psi [1 bar]
100 psi [7 bar] Maximum
Fully Adjustable (0 to 180°)
No Backlash at End of Rotation
Designed for 5 Million Trouble-Free Cycles
-20° to 160°F [-28.9° to 71.1°C]
THEORETICAL TORQUE
UNIT SIZE
RFSx14
RFSx20
RFSx25
in-lb/psi [Nm/bar]
.07
.24
.67
[.11]
[.40]
[1.09]
3D-29
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/rf
DIMENSIONS: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR, SIZE 14 & 20
F
J
6
2X E
2X Ø V ±.0005
[±.013]
SEE NOTE 1
2X Ø AA ±.0005 [±.013]
THRU ON W BOLT
HOLE CIRCLE
Y
A
ØD B
W
2X T THD THRU
C’BORE OPPOSITE
SIDE FOR U SHCS
3X Z THREAD THRU
ON W BOLT HOLE CIRCLE
2X S
2X G
H
R
2X BB
2X DD
3D
5
2X CC THREAD THRU
ON Y BOLT HOLE
CIRCLE
1
K
L
2X P PORT
4
M
2
N
C
NOTES:
1) THRU HOLES IN THE HUB ARE CLEARANCE FOR
SHCS MOUNTING OF THE UNIT FROM THE HUB SIDE
2) NUMBERS IN CIRCLES INDICATE PORT POSITION
3) OUTPUT HUB SHOWN AT MID-POSITION
UNIT
SIZE
RFS114
RFS514
RFS120
RFS520
A
1.713
[43.5]
2.598
[66.0]
B
2.501
[63.5]
3.700
[94.0]
UNIT
SIZE
RFS114
RFS514
RFS120
RFS520
U
#8
[M4]
#8
[M4]
V
.1283
[3.08]
.1908
[4.09]
C
.977
[24.8]
1.320
[33.5]
W
1.4940
[37.9]
2.106
[53.5]
D
2.244
[57.0]
3.386
[86.0]
Y
1.7080
[43.4]
2.0960
[53.2]
E
.546
[13.9]
.979
[24.9]
F
1.059
[26.9]
1.418
[36.0]
3
G
.394
[10.0]
.551
[14.0]
LETTER DIMENSION
AA
Z
5-40
.1283
[M3 x 0.5] [3.08]
8-32
.1283
[M4 x 0.7] [4.09]
LETTER DIMENSION
J
K
H
.473
.669
1.417
[17.0] [36.0] [12.0]
.610
.925
2.126
[23.5] [54.0] [15.5]
BB
60°
[60°]
60°
[60°]
CC
5-40
[M3 x 0.5]
5-40
[M3 x 0.5]
L
.197
[5.0]
.374
[9.5]
M
N
.303 .606
[7.7] [15.4]
.433 .780
[11.0] [19.8]
P
10-32
[M5 x 0.8]
10-32
[M5 x 0.8]
R
1.772
[45.0]
2.756
[70.0]
S
T
.236
1/4-20
[6.0] [M6 x 1.0]
.315
1/4-20
[8.0] [M6 x 1.0]
DD
26°
[26°]
26°
[26°]
].
3D-30
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/rf
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
DIMENSIONS: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR, SIZE 25
F
J
6
2X E
2X Ø V ±.0005
[±.013]
3X Z THREAD THRU
ON W BOLT
HOLE CIRCLE
SEE NOTE 1
4X THRU &
C’BORE OPPOSITE
SIDE FOR U SHCS
2X Ø AA ±.0005 [±.013]
THRU ON W BOLT
HOLE CIRCLE
Y
2X S
3X FF
A
Ø D B
4X T THD
x EE DP
W
2X G
2X CC THEAD THRU
ON Y BOLT HOLE CIRCLE
H
R
2X BB
2X DD
5
1
K
2X P PORT
L
4
M
2
N
C
3
NOTES:
1) THRU HOLES IN THE HUB ARE CLEARANCE FOR
SHCS MOUNTING OF THE UNIT FROM THE HUB SIDE
2) NUMBERS IN CIRCLES INDICATE PORT POSITION
3) OUTPUT HUB SHOWN AT MID-POSITION
UNIT
SIZE
RFS125
RFS525
UNIT
SIZE
RFS125
RFS525
B
C
A
4.252
5.826 1.728
[108.0] [148.0] [43.9]
U
#10
[M5]
V
.2533
[6.43]
W
3.110
[79.0]
D
3.622
[92.0]
Y
2.926
[74.3]
E
1.137
[28.9]
F
1.870
[47.5]
G
.787
[20.0]
LETTER DIMENSION
Z
AA
1/4-20
.2533
[M6 x 1.0] [5.09]
LETTER DIMENSION
J
K
H
1.220 2.953
.787
[31.0] [75.0] [20.0]
BB
60°
[60°]
CC
6-32
[M4 x 0.7]
DD
20°
[20°]
L
M
N
.472 .630 1.260
[12.0] [16.0] [32.0]
EE
.433
[11.0]
P
1/8 NPT
[1/8 BSPP]
R
2.500
[63.5]
T
S
1.575
1/4-20
[40.0] [M6 x 1.0]
FF
2.500
[63.5]
].
SOLUTIONS FOR
3D-31
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/rf
ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR
SPECIFICATIONS
UNIT SIZE
14
20
25
TORQUE AT 87 psi [6 bar]
in-lb
Nm
0.7
6.05
2.4
21.18
6.5
57.92
PISTON DIAMETER
in
mm
0.551
14
0.787
20
0.984
25
Standard angle of rotation is 180°. Consult PHD for rotation
requirements above 180°. All units are supplied with angle
adjustment which provides 90° adjustment from each end.
3D
Standard Series RF Rotary Actuators are recommended for use
in temperatures from -20° to +160°F [-28.9° to +71.1°C]. If a PHD
supplied external rotation speed control valve is used, the
temperature range is from 5° to 160°F [-15° to 71°C]. Consult PHD
for temperatures beyond this range.
LUBRICATION
lubricated air.
BACKLASH
All units have 0° of backlash at ends of rotation. For backlash
at mid-rotation see chart below.
BACKLASH AT MID-ROTATION
ROTATIONAL ALLOWANCE
The rotational tolerance of the Series RF Rotary Actuator is +0°
to +3° on the nominal specified rotation.
ROTATION RATES
The speeds given in the chart below reflect one cycle of 180°
with no load applied at 80 psi [5.5 bar]. Times given are average and
include the deceleration time through to stopping.
ROTATION SPEED CONTROLS
Control of output hub speed is extremely important as kinetic
energy generated by a rotating load is a function of rotational speed
and distance from the load to output hub center. Flow controls
should be considered to set speed so that the energy is within the
limit of the unit. See page 3D-33 for information on Series RF
Rotary Actuator controls. See pages 3D-37 through 3D-40 for
information on load stopping capacity.
± Degrees
2.80
1.38
0.82
WEIGHT TABLE
BEARING LOADS TABLE
UNIT
SIZE
14
20
25
MAXIMUM
AXIAL
PAYLOAD
lb
N
8.72
1.96
16.86
3.79
28.16
6.33
MAXIMUM RADIAL
PAYLOAD AT
MOUNTING SURFACE
lb
N
10.45
2.35
20.24
4.55
33.81
7.60
MAXIMUM COMBINED
RADIAL AND AXIAL
PAYLOAD
lb
N
5.92
1.33
11.52
2.59
19.22
4.32
INPUT
PRESSURE
bar
psi
2.7
40
3.4
50
4.1
60
4.8
70
5.5
80
6.2
90
100 6.8
RFSx14
in-lb
Nm
2.8
0.31
3.5
0.39
4.2
0.47
4.9
0.55
5.6
0.63
6.3
0.71
7.0
0.79
AIR VOLUME (2 x 180)
in3
cc
7.17
0.44
25.07
1.53
68.55
4.18
ANGLE OF ROTATION
All Series RF Rotary Actuators have a maximum pressure
rating of 100 psi [7 bar] with a 15 psi [1 bar] breakaway pressure.
UNIT SIZE
14
20
25
PISTON AREA
in2
cm2
0.239
1.54
0.487
3.14
0.761
4.91
UNIT SIZE
RFSx20
in-lb
Nm
9.7 1.10
12.2 1.38
14.6 1.65
17.0 1.93
19.5 2.20
21.9 2.48
24.3 2.75
RFSx25
Nm
in-lb
26.6 3.01
33.3 3.76
39.9 4.51
46.6 5.27
53.3 6.02
59.9 6.77
66.6 7.52
UNIT
SIZE
14
20
25
ACTUATOR WEIGHT
lb
kg
.28
0.62
.85
1.88
1.56
3.43
MAXIMUM
ROTATION RATE TABLE
UNIT
SIZE
14
20
25
ROTATION RATES @ 80 PSI
(SECONDS)
180°
90°
0.35
0.24
0.43
0.26
0.37
0.23
3D-32
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/rf
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
OPTIONS: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR
PB
BOTH DIRECTIONS
UNIT
SIZE
RFS114
RFS514
RFS120
RFS520
RFS125
RFS525
The PHD Series RF Rotary Actuators offer optional external
compact flow control fittings for adjusting output hub rotation
speed. The speed of the hub is controlled by regulating the cylinder
exhaust. The control fittings are unidirectional flow control valves
where intake air flows freely through the flow control and exhaust is
metered out through an adjustment screw. Intake capacity is slightly
greater than the full open exhaust capacity, enabling maximum
variation of hub rotation speed.
The PHD Series RF flow control fittings are mounted directly to
the caps and provide an integral tube fitting connection. They also
swivel 360° around the ports, providing easy installation of tubing.
Rotational velocities are adjusted and maintained by the captivated
fine adjustment screw with a locking nut to ensure precise velocity
control and repeatability in output hub rotation speed.
A
.984
[25.0]
.984
[25.0]
1.614
[41.0]
B
.827
[21.0]
1.043
[26.5]
1.043
[26.5]
LETTER DIMENSION
C
D
E
.015
.035
.394
[0.4]
[0.9] [10.0]
.136
.156
.394
[3.5]
[4.0] [10.0]
.089
.109
.650
[2.3]
[2.8] [16.5]
ØF
.156
[4.0]
.156
[4.0]
.250
[6.4]
M
.303
[7.7]
.433
[11.0]
.630
[16.0]
N
.606
[15.4]
.780
[19.8]
1.26
[32.0]
].
Ø F TUBE SIZE
E SQ
NOTE: Flow control fitting is effective between 15 to 100 psi
[1.0 to 7.0 bar] and from 5° to 160°F [-15° to 71.1°C].
A
B
UNIT SIZE
RFSx14 and RFSx20
RFSx25
REPLACEMENT KIT NO.
IMPERIAL
METRIC
68946-01
68947-01
68946-03
68947-03
D
C
1 KIT REQUIRED PER END OF ADJUSTMENT DESIRED
NOTE: ONE PORT CONTROL FITTING PER KIT
M
N
SOLUTIONS FOR
3D-33
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/rf
OPTIONS: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR
AB
SHOCK PAD INSTALLED BOTH ENDS
(STANDARD)
See pages 3D-37 through 3D-40 for details on the stopping
capacity of the installed angle adjustment with shock pad. Reference
the Angle Adjust Specifications Chart for nominal effective angle of
rotation in each direction.
The angle adjustment is factory installed and must remain
installed prior to operation. Operation of units without an angle
adjustment can damage the units and void any and all warranties.
Only the PHD angle adjustment with integral shock pad should be
used in Series RF Rotary Actuators. The use of any other angle
adjustment screw will affect the actuator performance and life
expectancy.
The angle adjustment screw has a standard shock pad
providing energy dissipation, accurate mechanical repeatability, and
quiet actuator operation at end of rotation.
The standard rotation for Series RF is 180 degrees. The
mechanical stop provides an adjustment range of 90 degrees from
each end of rotation. The ability to adjust over this wide range
eliminates the need to order special units with specific angles of
rotation.
3D
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT SPECIFICATIONS
UNIT
SIZE
14
20
25
KINETIC ENERGY
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT THREAD DECELERATION
STROKE
WEIGHT
LOAD
REPLACEMENT
TYPE
mm
in
mm
lb
kg
in-lb
Nm
KIT NO.
69713
M6 x 1.0
0.012 0.30 0.01 0.005 0.041 0.0046
69714
M8 x 1.25 0.022 0.56 0.03 0.014 0.145 0.0164
69715
M12 x 1.75 0.036 0.91 0.07 0.032 0.395 0.0446
LENGTH
in mm
0.96 24
1.56 40
1.97 50
WRENCH DECELERATION
EFFECTIVE
HEX SIZE
ANGLE
mm
3
5°
4
5°
6
5°
Angle Adjustment Replacement Kits Include:
(1) Angle adjustment screw with integral shock pad, (1) Nut, (1)
Thread Seal
1 Kit is required per end of adjustment desired
Q19
OUTPUT HUB WITH
HOLLOW PINION
(sizes 20 & 25 only)
This option provides a hole through the standard output hub
and pinion shaft for feeding pneumatic or electrical lines from the
back of the rotary actuator to the output hub. The hub has the same
mounting as the standard unit. A port is provided on the bottom of
the pinion shaft and an o-ring interface on the face of the
output hub.
UNIT SIZE
RFS120
RFS520
RFS125
RFS525
LETTER DIMENSION
Ø KK
Ø LL
.176
.295
[4.5]
[7.5]
.339
.433
[8.6]
[11.0]
MM
.039
[1.0]
.039
[1.0]
C
MM
HOLLOW PINION O-RING KIT
UNIT SIZE
14
20
25
ØA
10-32
[5 x 0.8]
1/8 NPT
[1/8 BSPP]
C
Ø KK
Ø LL
KIT NO.
—
3642-059-1
3642-064-1
A PORT THREAD
SECTION C-C
3D-34
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/rf
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
ACCESSORIES: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR
PROXIMITY SWITCH KIT
This accessory provides for the mounting of a 6 mm square,
PHD Series 5580 solid state switch, or PHD 18431 inductive
proximity switch. One switch mounting kit is required per switch,
with the typical application requiring two kits. The kit includes a
switch target as well as the required mounting hardware.
The Series RF body accepts two proximity switches, which are
easily mounted on the actuator using the switch slots in the sides of
the body.
The switch targets mount in the groove around the output hub
OD. The switch target has a magnet on one side for use with the
Series 5580 switch and is to be installed with the magnet toward the
switch face. If the Series 18431 switch is used, the magnet should
be installed away from the switch face.
Proximity switches are ordered separately, see PHD's main
catalog for complete switch specifications.
PROXIMITY SWITCH KITS
UNIT
SIZE KIT NO.
14
69700
20
69700
25
69702
EACH SWITCH KIT CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING:
1 - TARGET ASSEMBLY W/MAGNET
1 - TARGET FASTENER
1 - SWITCH FASTENER
RFSx25 UNIT KITS ALSO INCLUDE:
1 - SWITCH BRACKET
SERIES 5580 HALL EFFECT SWITCHES
SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS
PART NO.
55803-1-02
55804-1-02
55823-1
55824-1
SERIES 5580 HALL EFFECT SWITCH
BAND WIDTH
UNIT REPEATABILITY HYSTERESIS
SIZE
(DEGREES)
(DEGREES) MAX (DEG) MIN (DEG)
14
± .09
± .26
27
14
20
± .10
± .28
14
9
25
± .11
± .35
11
8
DESCRIPTION
NPN 4.5 - 24 VDC with 2 meter cable
PNP 4.5 - 24 VDC with 2 meter cable
NPN 4.5 - 24 VDC with Quick Connect
PNP 4.5 - 24 VDC with Quick Connect
SERIES 5580 REED SWITCHES
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
55802-1-02 NPN or PNP 4.5 - 24 VDC with 2 meter cable
NPN or PNP 4.5 - 24 VDC with Quick Connect
55822-1
SERIES 5580 REED SWITCH
REPEATABILITY
HYSTERESIS
BAND WIDTH
UNIT
SIZE
(DEGREES)
± .53
31
20
14
± .18
± .63
31
14
20
± .19
± .63
16
12
25
± .74
6 mm SQUARE INDUCTIVE PROXIMITY SWITCHES
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
18431-001-02 NPN 10 - 30 VDC with 2 meter cable
18431-002-02 PNP 10 - 30 VDC with 2 meter cable
SERIES 18431 6 mm SQUARE INDUCTIVE SWITCH
BAND WIDTH
UNIT REPEATABILITY HYSTERESIS
SIZE
(DEGREES)
± .79
36
27
14
± .35
± .72
32
18
20
± .36
± .67
14
9
25
± .14
SERIES RFSx14 & 20
REQUIRED
REQUIRED
SWITCH TORQUE SWITCH TARGET TORQUE TARGET
FASTENER
FASTENER
FASTENER
FASTENER
in-lb
Nm
in-lb
Nm
SIZE
SIZE
M3 x 0.5 x 4
5
0.6
M4 x 0.7
0.6
5
M3 x 0.5 x 4
5
0.6
M4 x 0.7
5
0.6
M3 x 0.5 x 14
10
1.1
M4 x 0.7
5
0.6
CORDSETS WITH QUICK CONNECT
PART NO.
17533-00-02
17533-00-05
LENGTH
2 meter cable
5 meter cable
SERIES RFSx25
SWITCH KIT
(1 KIT PER ROTATION)
SWITCH
(SOLD SEPARATELY)
SWITCH KIT
(1 KIT PER ROTATION)
TARGET FASTENER
SWITCH FASTENER
SWITCH SLOT
(ONE EACH SIDE)
TARGET FASTENER
SWITCH SLOT
(ONE EACH SIDE)
SWITCH
(SOLD SEPARATELY)
UNIT
SIZE
RFSx14
RFSx20
RFSx25
A
SWITCH FASTENER
LETTER DIMENSION
B
D
A
C
—
.213
—
.457
—
[5.4]
—
[11.6]
—
.531
—
.720
—
[13.5]
—
[18.3]
1.902
.732
.788
1.913
[48.3]
[18.6] [20.0] [48.6]
].
D
A
C
B
SOLUTIONS FOR
3D-35
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
C
www.phdinc.com/rf
ACCESSORIES: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR
GRT MOUNTING KIT
The PHD Series RF Rotary Actuator features a mounting hole
pattern that directly connects specific sizes of the PHD Series GRT
Gripper to the hub. This mounting kit provides the necessary
mounting hardware for mounting a Series GRT Gripper onto a
Series RF Rotary Actuator.
TRANSITION PLATE
MOUNTING KIT
SERIES SHP
MOUNTING KIT
SHP MOUNTING KIT
The PHD Series RF Rotary Actuator features a mounting hole
pattern that directly connects specific sizes of the PHD Series SHP
Slides to the hub. This mounting kit provides the necessary
mounting hardware for mounting a Series SHP Slides to a Series RF
Rotary Actuator.
SERIES GRT
MOUNTING KIT
SHP SLIDE
3D
BLANK TRANSITION PLATE
MOUNTING KIT
BLANK
TRANSITION PLATE
This accessory provides for the mounting of devices other than
PHD Series GRT Grippers and Series SHP Slides to the Series RF
Rotary Actuator. The kit includes an anodized, 6061-T6 aluminum,
transition plate, pre-drilled to mount to the rotary actuator hub,
along with the associated mounting hardware. The mounting holes
for the secondary unit are to be machined by the customer.
GRT GRIPPER
SERIES RF
ROTARY ACTUATOR
Ø C (SLIDE RETACTED)
ØC
(GRIPPER OPEN )
GRT MOUNTING KIT
(A)
UNIT
SIZE
KIT NO.
RFS114 69726
RFS514 69741
RFS120 69727
RFS520 69742
RFS125 69728
RFS525 69743
(A)
SERIES GRT
GRIPPER
UNIT SIZE
GRT112
GRT512
GRT122
GRT522
GRT142
GRT542
FASTENER
SIZE
5-40 x 1
[ M3 x 0.5 x 25 ]
8-32 x 1 1/8
[ M4 x 0.7 x 30 ]
1/4-20 x 1 5/8
[ M6 x 1.0 x 40 ]
REQUIRED
TORQUE
in-lb
Nm
20
[2.3]
20
[2.3]
40
[4.5]
40
[4.5]
140 [15.8]
140 [15.8]
B
SHP MOUNTING KIT
GRT DIMENSIONS
UNIT
SIZE
RFS114
RFS514
RFS120
RFS520
RFS125
RFS525
LETTER DIMENSION
A
ØB
2.038
2.132
[51.8]
[54.2]
2.756
2.792
[70.0]
[70.9]
3.696
3.898
[93.9]
[99.0]
SHP DIMENSIONS
UNIT
SIZE
RFS114
RFS514
RFS120
RFS520
RFS125
RFS525
LETTER DIMENSION
A
B
ØC
1.607
.197
3.823
[40.8]
[5.0]
[97.1]
2.107
.039
4.733
[53.5]
[1.0]
[120.2]
2.712
.433
5.835
[68.9]
[11.0]
[148.2]
UNIT
SIZE
RFS114
RFS514
RFS120
RFS520
RFS125
RFS525
SERIES SHP
SLIDE
KIT NO.
UNIT SIZE
69703 SHP108 x 40
69706 SHP508 x 40
69704 SHP112 x 40
69707 SHP512 x 40
69705 SHP116 x 55
69708 SHP516 x 55
FASTENER
SIZE
5-40 x 5/8
[ M3 x 0.5 x 16 ]
5-40 x 7/8
[ M3 x 0.5 x 20 ]
6-32 x 1
[ M4 x 0.7 x 30 ]
REQUIRED
TORQUE
Nm
in-lb
[2.3]
20
[2.3]
20
[2.3]
20
[2.3]
20
[4.5]
40
[4.5]
40
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED DOWEL PINS
SERIES GRT
GRIPPER
PIN SIZE
UNIT
SIZE
RFS114 Ø 1/8 x 3/8
RFS514 [Ø 3 x 12]
RFS120 Ø 3/16 x 5/8
RFS520 [Ø 4 x 16]
RFS125 Ø 1/4 x 3/4
RFS525 [Ø 6 x 20]
SERIES SHP
SLIDE
PIN SIZE
BLANK
TRANSITION
PLATE PIN SIZE
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ø 1/8 x 1/2
[Ø 3 x 14]
Ø 3/16 x 3/4
[Ø 4 x 18]
Ø 1/4 x 3/4
[Ø 6 x 20]
BLANK TRANSITION PLATE MOUNTING KIT
UNIT
SIZE
KIT NO.
RFS114 69729
RFS514 69732
RFS120 69730
RFS520 69733
RFS125 69731
RFS525 69734
BLANK
TRANSITION
PLATE NO.
69721-1
69721-5
69722-1
69722-5
69723-1
69723-5
TRANSITION
PLATE
SIZE
.312 x Ø 2.205
[7.9 x Ø 56.0]
.433 x Ø 3.346
[11.0 x Ø 85.0]
.500 x Ø 3.583
[12.7 x Ø 91.0]
FASTENER
SIZE
5-40 x 3/8
[M3 x 0.5 x 10]
8-32 x 1/2
[M4 x 0.7 x 12]
1/4-20 x 5/8
[M6 x 1.0 x 16]
REQUIRED
TORQUE
in-lb
Nm
20
[2.3]
20
[2.3]
40
[4.5]
40
[4.5]
140 [15.8]
140 [15.8]
3D-36
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/rf
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
ROTARY ACTUATOR SELECTION: SERIES RF
SIZING A SERIES RF UNIT BASED ON
TORQUE OUTPUT AND STOPPING CAPACITY
SIZING
SIZING A SERIES RF UNIT BASED ON
STOPPING CAPACITY
A number of factors must be considered when selecting a
Series RF Rotary Actuator. These include actuator orientation, total
load attached and rotational speed. The process of selecting the
proper Series RF rotary actuator consists of three main steps:
1) Size the actuator based on the torque requirements
2) Size the actuator based on stopping capacity
3) Size the actuator based on bearing capacity
Choose the actuator which meets the requirements of your
application.
STEP 4
Calculate the Peak Velocity (ω)
This formula estimates the peak velocity of the Series RF in
operation, and is used to determine the stopping capacity of
the rotary actuator. The result is given in radians/sec.
Average Velocity (deg/sec) = Rotational Angle in Degrees
Time of Rotation in Seconds
STEP 1
Determine Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (Jm)
calculate the mass moment of inertia for the type of condition
illustrated. The total mass moment of inertia is the sum of the
individual calculations.
Peak Velocity = .024 x Average Velocity
STEP 2
Determine Necessary Acceleration (αA)
This equation calculates the acceleration necessary to move
through the required angle of rotation in the specified time. The
results are given in radians/sec2.
STEP 3
Calculate the Required Starting Torque (TA)
calculate the torque for each for each type of condition
illustrated that matches your application. The total torque will
be the sum of the individual calculations. Note: Torque
calculations are theoretical, an appropriate safety factor
should be considered. PHD recommends a minimum safety
factor of 2 to account for friction loss, air line and valve size,
and attached accessories.
SHOCK PAD ENERGY CAPACITY
16.0
Allowable Impact Velocity (rad/sec)
Acceleration (rad/sec2) = αA =
STEP 5
Compare the peak velocity to the maximum allowable
application. The chart is labeled Shock Pad Energy
degree of motion reversal when the load comes to the end of
stroke. Note: The unit may be run at slightly higher velocities
and loads than these charts indicate without damage; however,
the motion profile may be unacceptable. Please contact PHD if
the Series RF Rotary Actuator is to be used outside of the
recommended energy range. If the shock pad does not provide
enough stopping capacity for the application, the next larger
size of actuator should be considered.
Starting Torque (in/lb) = TA, TAg
Balanced Load TA = Jm x αA x SF
Unbalanced Load TAg = [(Jm x αA) + (Fg x k)] x SF
14.0
12.0
10.0
8.0
RFSx25
6.0
RFSx20
4.0
RFSx14
2.0
0.0
0
0.005
[.00057]
0.01
[.00113]
0.015
[.00169]
0.02
[.00226]
2
2
Attached Load, Moment Of Inertia (in-lb-sec ) [Nm-s ]
3D-37
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/rf
SIZING A SERIES RF UNIT BASED ON BEARING
CAPACITY
STEP 6
The charts on the next page are divided into two categories.
The charts on the left are used when axial and radial loads are
known. Use these charts to determine if your application is within
the allowable attached load for a specific size. Refer to the proper
charts based on your intended actuator orientation and load. The
charts on the next page are used when the load is defined and the
distance of the center of gravity of the load from the center of
rotation or face of the rotary actuator is known. See the illustration
below.
3D
CG
Horizontal Orientation (in)
(CG)= Distance from Face of Hub to
Center of Gravity of Load
Vertical Orientation (in)
(CG)= Distance from Centerline of Hub
to Center of Gravity of Load
Cg
Using Known Axial and Radial Graphs
If the application is strictly axial the unit can be loaded up to
the maximum shown on the X axis. If there is combined axial and
radial loading, check the known values against the maximum
indicated in the chart. The line in the center is the point where the
axial load is matched to the radial load. This is the maximum load
that can be applied in combined loading applications. Also be aware
that the distance from the face of the hub to the center of gravity is
critical in determining the reaction force back at the bearing. If exact
radial and axial loads are unknown, PHD recommends using the
Load vs. CG Distance charts on the next page.
Using Known Load and Center of Gravity Distance
If there is an unbalanced load, refer to the chart labeled Load
vs. CG Distance, this chart takes into account reactionary forces and
shows the allowable load at a given center of gravity distance.
Check the application against this chart for proper selection.
3D-38
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/rf
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
AXIAL VS. RADIAL LOAD LIMITS
LOAD VS. CENTER OF GRAVITY DISTANCE
Distance
CG
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
Axial Load
Radial Load
2.35
[10.45]
2.5
[11.12]
RFSx14
Maximum Radial Load
1.2
[5.34]
1
[4.45]
1.334
[5.94]
1.5
[6.67]
Load lb [N]
Radial Load lb [N]
2.0
[8.90]
Combined Maximum Load
1.0
[4.45]
0
0.8
[3.56]
0.6
[2.67]
Maximum Axial
Load
1.96
[8.72]
0.4
[1.78]
0.50
[2.22]
0.2
[0.89]
0
0.2
[0.89]
0.4
[1.78]
0.6
[2.67]
0.8
[3.56]
1
[4.45]
1.2
[5.34]
1.4
[6.23]
1.6
[7.12]
1.8
[8.01]
0
2
[8.90]
0
0.4
[10.16]
0.2
[5.08]
Axial Load lb [N]
4.5
[20.02]
0.8
[20.32]
1.2
[30.48]
1
[25.4]
1.4
[35.56]
RFSx20
3
[13.35]
2.59
[11.52]
1.799
[8.00]
Maximum Radial Load
2.5
[11.12]
3.5
[15.57]
Load lb [N]
4.0
[17.79]
2.59
[11.52]
3.0
[13.35]
2.5
[11.12]
0.6
[15.24]
Center of Gravity Distance in [mm]
RFSx20
4.55
[20.24]
5.0
[22.24]
Radial Load lb [N]
RFSx14
1.334
[5.94]
1.4
[6.23]
.899
[4.00]
2.0
[8.90]
Maximum Axial Load
3.79
[16.86]
1.5
[6.67]
2
[8.90]
1.5
[6.67]
1
[4.45]
1.0
[4.45]
0.5
[2.22]
0.50
[2.22]
0
0
0.5
[2.22]
1
[4.45]
1.5
[6.67]
2
[8.90]
2.5
[11.12]
3
[13.35]
3.5
[15.57]
0
4
[17.79]
0
0.5
[12.7]
7.60
[33.81]
4
[17.79]
Maximum Radial Load
3.5
[15.57]
6
[26.69]
4.32
[19.22]
5
[22.24]
4
[17.79]
3
[13.35]
3
[13.35]
2.5
[11.12]
2
[8.90]
1.5
[6.67]
Maximum Axial Load
6.33
[28.16]
2
[8.90]
1
[4.45]
1
[4.45]
0
2.5
[63.5]
RFSx25
4.32
[19.22]
4.5
[20.02]
Load lb [N]
Radial Load lb [N]
RFSx25
2.811
[12.50]
7
[31.14]
2
[50.8]
Axial Load lb [N]
8
[35.59]
1.5
[38.1]
1
[25.4]
0.5
[2.22]
0
1
[4.45]
2
[8.90]
3
[13.35]
4
[17.79]
5
[22.24]
6
[26.69]
7
[31.14]
Axial Load lb [N]
0
0
0.5
[12.7]
1
[25.4]
1.5
[38.1]
2
[50.8]
2.5
[63.5]
3
[76.2]
3.5
[88.9]
4
[101.6]
4.5
[114.3]
3D-39
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/rf
IMPERIAL UNITS:
t = time (sec)
SF = Safety Factor
METRIC UNITS:
2
α = Acceleration (rad/sec )
t = time (sec)
SF = Safety Factor
BALANCED LOADS
T = Jm x α x SF
Disk
Disk
Mounted on center
Solid Sphere
3D
Mounted on center
L
k
k
k
2
Jm = Fg x k
2
g
Jm =
LOAD ORIENTATION
Fg
1
x
x
g
4
2
( L3 + k )
Jm =
2
2 Fg
x
x k2
5
g
Rectangular Plate
Rod
Mounted on center
Mounted on center
k dim is
radius
of rod
b
(with gravity)
a
a
2
2
Jm = Fg x a + 3k
12
g
2
2
Jm = Fg x a + b
g
12
(without gravity)
UNBALANCED LOADS
UNBALANCED LOADS
T = Jm x α x SF
2
T = Jm x α x SF
Point Load
Rectangular Plate
Rod
Mounted off center
Mounted off center
Fg2
Fg2
c
k
Jm =
Fg
x k2
g
k dim is
radius
of rod
b
b
Fg
a
Fg1
2
2
2
2
Jm = Fg1 x 4a + c + Fg2 x 4b + c
g
g
12
12
a
Jm =
(Fg
g1
Fg1
2
2
Fg2 (4b2 + 3k2)
x (4a + 3k ) +
x
g
12
12
)(
)
3D-40
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/rf
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
SIZING EXAMPLE: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR
CG
Weight = .75 lb + .25 lb Plate
Pressure = 65 psi
Center of Gravity Distance = 1.125" for .75 lb
.5" for .25 lb
Safety Factor = 2
Axial Load = .75 lb + .25 lb
1.125"
.75 lb
.5"
.25 lb
2"
EXAMPLE 1
STEP 1
Determine Jm of Plate mounted off center
Jm =
.083
386.4
x
STEP 4
Calculate Peak Velocity
Fg1 4a2 + c2 Fg2 4b2 + c2
x
+
x
g
g
12
12
Average Velocity =
4(2)2 + (2)2
4(1)2 + (2)2 .167
+
x
12
12
386.4
180
= 514.28 deg/sec
.35
Peak Velocity = .024 x Average Velocity(rad/sec)
.000143 + .000720326
Peak Velocity = .024 x 514.28 = 12.34 rad/sec
STEP 5
Compare the Peak Velocity
Jm = .0008633 in-lb-sec2
Compare this value to the Shock Pad Energy Capacity chart on
page 11. We see the following:
(.0002148 x .6667) + (.000432195 x 1.6667)
Determine Point Load
• The size 14 will not handle the Jm value.
Jm =
Jm =
Fg
x K2
g
• The size 20 will not attain the speed required.
.75
x (1.125)2
386.4
Jm = .0019409 x 1.2656
Jm = .002456 in-lb-sec2
Jm Total = .00086 + .00245 = .00331 in-lb-sec2
STEP 2
Determine Acceleration
αA = .035 x
• The size 25 will perform the task in the desired time.
STEP 6
Determine the bearing capabilities of a Size 25
Since we know the axial loading but not the radial loading for
this application, we compare it to the Load vs. CG Distance Chart on
page 3D-39.
At this loading condition the size 25 has the capability of 1 lb at
around 2.2 inches off center. Our application is at 1.125 inches.
Therefore; the RFSx25 is suitable for this application.
180
(.35)2
αA = 51.429 rad/sec2
STEP 3
Starting Torque
T = Jm x αA x SF
T = .00331 x 51.429 x 2
T = .3405 in-lb
3D-41
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/rf
Weight = 1.5 lb
Pressure = 60 psi
Orientation = Horizontal
Center of Gravity Distance = .5"
Safety Factor = 2
Axial Load = Ø
Cycles per minute = 20
1"
2.60 Ø
EXAMPLE 2
STEP 1
Determine Jm
(Equation is from page 14, Disk Mounted on Center)
3D
Jm =
Jm =
Fg
g
x
K2
2
STEP 5
Check this value against the Shock Pad Energy Capacity chart
on page 3D-37.
(1.3)2
1.5
x
386.4
2
• The size 14 cannot handle the Jm value of .0038. The size 14
cannot stop the load.
• The size 20 can stop the load and perform the task in the
required time.
STEP 2
STEP 6
Determining the bearing capabilities of a Size 20.
αA = .035 x
180
(.5)2
αA = 25.2 rad/sec2
We now check the loading condition against the Load vs. CG
Distance chart for the size 20 on page 3D-39.
We see that a size 20 can handle approximately 2 lbs at
.5 inches from center of gravity distance.
Therefore; the RFSx20 is suitable for this application.
STEP 3
Starting Torque
(Equation is from page 14)
T = Jm x αA x SF
T = .00328 x 25.2 x 2
T = .165 in-lb
STEP 4
Average Velocity =
180
= 360 degrees/sec
.5
Peak Velocity = .024 x Average Velocity (rad/sec)
Peak Velocity = .024 x 360 = 8.64 rad/sec
3D-42
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/rf
CAT-03
SOLUTIONS FOR
Weight = 1.75 lb
Pressure = 80 psi
Center of Gravity Distance = Ø
Desired Cycle Rate = 1.0 sec
Safety Factor = 2
Axial Load = 1.75 lb (weight)
Cycles per minute = 30
2.80 Ø
1"
EXAMPLE 3
STEP 1
Determine Jm
(Equation is from page 14, Disk Mounted on Center)
Fg K2
x
Jm =
g
2
Jm =
STEP 5
Compare this value to the Shock Pad Energy Capacity chart on
page 11.
(1.4)2
1.75
x
386.4
2
• The size 14 will handle the Jm value at the rated Peak
Velocity.
STEP 2
Acceleration (rad/sec ) = αA =
2
αA = .035 x
180
(1.0)2
STEP 6
Determine the bearing capabilities of size 14.
Use the Axial vs. Radial Load Limits chart for the RFSx14 on
page 3D-39.
Since we have only an axial load we can support
up to 1.96 lb.
Therefore; the Series RFSx14 is suitable for this application.
αA = 6.3 rad/sec
2
STEP 3
Starting Torque
(Equation is from page 3D-40)
T = Jm x αA x SF
T = .0044 x 6.3 x 2
T = .055 in/lb
STEP 4
Average Velocity =
180
= 180 degrees/sec
1.0
Peak Velocity = .024 x Average Velocity (rad/sec)
Peak Velocity = .024 x 180 = 4.32 rad/sec
3D-43
SOLUTIONS FOR
(800) 624-8511
CAT-03
www.phdinc.com/rf

ROTARY ACTUATORS

Transcription

Similar documents

PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS

muscle car raffle flyer!

Rotary International Global Grant 1423208

HELP DENTAID TO END ORAL PAIN

GT-R Installation Article Series

Rotary Club of Cooma Inc Rotary Theme for the Month

Sony CDX

An Oshtemo Community Event for all!

January 2011 - New Milford Rotary Club

Guard Actuator and Actuator Extension Usage Chart